JP2018082911A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with improved accuracy in a drive control of movable accessories.SOLUTION: A louver drive gear G33 has two (2) protrusions G41 that protrude outward relative to the circumferential direction. The two (2) protrusions G41 are arranged on a same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the louver drive gear G33. A sub CPU detects the rotational positions of louver plates G13, G14 and G15 by using the two (2) protrusions G41 of the respective louver drive gears G33 and sensors G40 for detecting the protrusions G41 and controls the rotation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 147

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a "pachislot" comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a controller. A game machine called is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the stop control of the reel rotation based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. Examples of privileges granted to a player include payout of game media (medals, etc.), re-game (replay) operation in which internal lottery processing is performed again without consuming game media, and game media payout opportunities. The operation of a bonus game that increases can be mentioned.

  In addition, a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory that is driven and controlled by a driving unit is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Patent Document 1 discloses a movable member that is movably disposed, a drive unit that moves the movable member along a track, an acceleration sensor that detects the tilt of the movable member, and a tilt that is detected by the track and the acceleration sensor. There has been proposed a gaming machine having position calculating means for calculating the position of a moving member from the above relationship.

JP 2009-178405 A

  However, there is room for further improvement in the technology for improving the accuracy of drive control of the movable accessory.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the accuracy of drive control of a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A movable accessory (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15 described later) that rotates by driving of the driving unit,
A gear (for example, a louver driving gear G33 described later) that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the movable accessory;
A first detected portion and a second detected portion (for example, two protrusions G41 described later) provided on the outer peripheral portion of the gear;
A detection unit (for example, a sensor G40 described later) that detects the first detection unit and the second detection unit;
The gaming machine, wherein the first detected part and the second detected part are arranged on the same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the gear.

The gaming machine includes a projector (for example, an irradiation light device B described later) that projects an image,
The movable accessory includes a first surface (for example, a first surface G21a described later) that forms a display surface on which an image projected by the projector can be displayed, and a second surface opposite to the first surface. A movable part having a surface (for example, a second surface G21b described later) and rotatably provided;
When the detection unit detects the first detection unit or the second detection unit, the first surface or the second surface may be substantially parallel to the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the precision of drive control of a movable accessory can be improved.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a whole front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a front view which shows a part of external structure of the state which removed the protective cover of the said pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout diagram inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side board of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the image display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows another part of the display screen displayed on the image display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the alerting | reporting of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviated name of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the subflag conversion table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table in CZ1 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point up lottery table in CZ2 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows CT CT lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the top lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number of sets during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus classification lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table on the number of bonus ART games memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus end time CT lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the non-ART flag conversion lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the said pachislot machine, and the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side. It is a figure which shows the accessory data table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the normal start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the CZ * ART completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation | movement sequence registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the movable screen position determination process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the chance button process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the error display process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the navigation position designation | designated process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED data registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the game recording process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the image display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for F screens displayed on the display unit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for R screens displayed on the display unit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image for W screens displayed on the display unit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error image | video displayed on the image display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st navigation image | video displayed on the display unit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd navigation image | video displayed on the display unit of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT precursor in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in ART memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT precursor in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the alerting | reporting between MB flags in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the pachislot machine, and the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lock state and alerting | reporting in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the upper part of the pachi-slot machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view of the display unit in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 138. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the display unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view of the fixed screen mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded view of the fixed screen mechanism G in 3rd Embodiment. It is CC sectional view taken on the line of the back screen shown in FIG. It is a bottom view of fixed screen mechanism G in a 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view of the louver drive gear which is a member which comprises the louver drive part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of the louver board and louver drive gear in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection state of the sensor at the time of rotation of the louver board in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is the detection state of a sensor when a louver board rotates counterclockwise seeing from the top. (B) shows the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotated clockwise as viewed from above, and (c) is a table showing the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotating. is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the excitation aspect of the stepping motor in 3rd Embodiment, (a) shows the aspect at the time of rotating a louver plate the fastest, (b) is the aspect at the time of rotating a louver plate normally. Indicates. An excitation mode of the stepping motor when performing the backlash operation in the third embodiment is shown, (a) shows a mode of 30 degree backlash operation, and (b) shows a mode of 15 degree backlash operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the coating aspect of the fixed screen mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the three-dimensional decoration in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded view of the three-dimensional decoration in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded view of the light transmissive member in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 152. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of LED and a crystal part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect lottery table used at the time of the normal game state and effect state A in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect lottery table used at the time of the normal game state and effect state B in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect lottery table used at the time of the normal game state and effect state C in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect lottery table used at the time of the chance zone (CZ) and effect state C in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state before start command reception. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state after start command reception. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state after 1st stop operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state after 2nd stop operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state after 3rd stop operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation in the production state C of 3rd Embodiment, and shows the state after receiving a winning action command. It is a figure for demonstrating the production aspect of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of a louver board in an origin is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating the production aspect of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of the louver board rotated 45 degree | times from the origin, (b) is the figure seen from diagonally upward. . It is a figure for demonstrating the production aspect of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of a louver board rotated 90 degree | times from the origin is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating the production aspect of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of the louver board rotated 135 degree | times from the origin, (b) is the figure seen from diagonally upward. . It is a figure for demonstrating the production aspect of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of the louver board rotated 180 degree | times from the origin, (b) is a top view. It is a figure for demonstrating whether the transition of the production | presentation state within the lock time in 3rd Embodiment is possible. The effect state transition lottery table used at the time of the effect state A in 3rd Embodiment is shown. The effect state transition lottery table used at the time of the effect state B in 3rd Embodiment is shown. The effect state transition lottery table used at the time of the effect state C in 3rd Embodiment is shown. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the production using the louver screen in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a front view of the louver board in an origin, (b) The louver rotated 45 degree | times from the origin It is a front view of a board, (c) is a front view of a louver board rotated 90 degrees from the origin, (d) is a front view of a louver board rotated 135 degrees from the origin, (e) is from the origin It is a front view of the louver board rotated 180 degrees. It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd modification of the effect using the louver screen in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is the front view and top view of a louver screen and back screen in an origin, b) A front view and a top view of the louver screen and the rear screen rotated by 90 degrees from the origin, and (c) is a front view and a top view of the louver screen and the rear screen rotated by 180 degrees from the origin. When the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a 1st movement position, (a) is a side view of a display unit, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. When the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a 2nd movement position, (a) is a side view of a display unit, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. When the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a front exposure position, (a) is a side view of a display unit, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. It is a figure which shows the other example of the image displayed on the Freon screen mechanism in a 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect | action in 3rd Embodiment, and the aspect which is displaying the image on a back screen is shown.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as game media. Since these are valuable in games, they may be called game values or game values. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability is higher than the normal time between the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) which is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and the specific number of plays. A pachislot machine having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which the function RT is simultaneously operated will be described.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachislot machine 1 is set to a single value (from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535)). Hereinafter, random numbers) are extracted. Strictly speaking, the unit game is started by performing random number extraction based on the fact that a predetermined switch detects a game start condition by operating the start lever 6.

  The internal winning combination determining means (internal lottery processing of FIG. 80 executed by the main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means detects the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 32) constituting the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation of the game (satisfaction of a predetermined start condition). ), An internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined winning probability. The internal winning combination may be referred to as a winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means may be referred to as a winning determining means or a prior determining means.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), bonusing, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, reel stop control means (main CPU 93, stepping motors 51L, 51C described later) 51R) performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Note that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can display symbols in a variable manner, and may be referred to as variable indicators or variable indicators.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 ms) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is the number of four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined, uses the specified time, and the symbol combination is displayed as a winning line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so that they are not displayed along the effective line using the specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Thus, when all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 to be described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. Determine whether or not. In some cases, symbols displayed when a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped are simply expressed as a stop display or a display result. In addition, when a combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line when a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, it may be expressed as derivation of a stop display or derivation of a display result. Sometimes expressed as an acceptable condition.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means. It should be possible to generate “winning” by determining whether the symbol stopped on the active line is related to “winning” or not, and it became “winning” by the internal winning combination and the stopped symbol. Whether or not the combination matches the combination may or may not be determined. If it is performed, the security is improved, and if it is not performed, the security is slightly lowered, but the program capacity of the main ROM 94 described later can be reduced.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, various effects are produced by using the output of light (video) performed by the display unit 100, the output of sound performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof in the above-described series of flows. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is performed by a sub-control board described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effects in conjunction with the respective triggers such as the start of reel rotation, the stop of rotation of each reel, and the determination of the presence or absence of a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination is a game. It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  A housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62 a disposed at the upper front of the cabinet 61, and a lower front of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b. Note that the cabinet 61 may be referred to as a gaming machine main body. Further, since the cabinet 61 functions as a frame body that supports the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be called a support body, a support frame, a fixed frame, or the like. In this embodiment, there are two door members provided on the front side of the gaming machine, the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b. However, this is only an example, and the gaming machine has one or three or more door members. The invention disclosed in this specification may be applied to the extent possible.

  The cabinet 61 is configured by a cabinet upper portion 61a and a cabinet lower portion 61b separated from the cabinet upper portion 61a by the intermediate support plate 301, and accommodates equipment (for example, a hopper device) used in the game.

  The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shapes and sizes of the openings of the cabinet upper part 61a and the cabinet lower part 61b, respectively. The upper door 62a is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the cabinet upper part 61a, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the cabinet lower part 61b.

  A display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet upper portion 61a. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and constitutes display means for displaying various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display. In the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as will be described later.

  A protective cover 20 is provided on the front surface of the display unit 100 in the upper cabinet portion 61a so that an image displayed on the display unit 100 can be visually recognized. The protective cover 20 has a light shielding property against light incident from the outside to the inside, and suppresses a reduction in the visibility of various images displayed on the display unit 100 due to external light. The protective cover 20 in the present embodiment is configured by a member having a transmittance of about 50% to 80%.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross down line are displayed. A reel unit (not shown) constituting the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detachably attached to the back side of the display window 4.

  As shown in FIG. 4, panels 21 a and 21 b are provided inside the protective cover 20 of the upper door 62 a so as to hide the left and right display areas of the display unit 100. The panel 21a, 21b is formed with a region having translucency. In this area, decoration portions 22a and 22b, each of which is decorated with a picture representing a gaming state, are arranged.

  The decorative portions 22a and 22b in the present embodiment are formed by a pattern representing a gaming state applied to the panels 21a and 21b. The decorative portions 22a and 22b are provided with decorative LEDs 23a and 23b (see FIG. 32) as light sources for irradiating light from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays 3 × 3 symbols. Five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is an effective line, and a winning determination is made based on a combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the “number of inserted medals” includes both the BET number by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the inserted number actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band in which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on each outer peripheral surface. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols drawn on each reel band can be viewed from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner.

  A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, an LED (not shown) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided.

  By depressing this MAX bet button 11, the number (three) of medals used for a unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, every time the 1-bet button is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for a unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

  In the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a chance button 33 is provided as a production operation means used for production. The production operation means is not limited to a button such as the chance button 33 but may be configured by other mechanisms such as a lever and a MAX bet button 11.

  The chance button 33 is provided with a chance button LED 34 (see FIG. 32) as a production operation light source. The chance button LED 34 in the present embodiment is provided to illuminate the chance button 33 from the inside so that the chance button 33 appears to be lit when lit.

  An information display 14 is provided at the approximate center in the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number). The information display 14 also has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying the game to the player is provided.

  In addition, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. Is provided. The instruction monitor is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, “push order combination” is provided in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the order of the stop operation (push order). For example, “1” is displayed when the push order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)” is notified. , “2” is displayed when the push order “2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)” is notified, and the push order “3rd (first stop operation to the right reel 3R) is displayed. “3” is displayed when “ Details of notification of stop operation information in the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 54. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, the stop operation information may be notified using other means controlled by the sub-control board 72. For example, Information on the stop operation may be notified in the display unit 100 described above.

  In this case, the notification mode in the instruction monitor may be different from the notification mode in other means. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information about the stop operation (for example, “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, and it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays “1” uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation to the left. It is good also as notifying directly about what is performed with respect to this reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on a necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. . Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the later-described ART gaming state (see FIG. 36) without notifying the stop operation information in the later-described general gaming state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching credit / payout of medals obtained by the player in the game by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the checkout button 13, a start lever 6 is provided as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by the player's tilting operation and starting the display of symbols in the display window 4. It is attached so that it can be tilted freely in the angle range.

  Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's pressing operation are provided in the approximate center of the front surface portion of the base portion 10, respectively. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 6 is operated, and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  A touch panel unit 201 is provided in front of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The touch panel unit 201 includes an image display device 201a including a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and the like, and displays various types of information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the touch panel unit 201 is located on the left side of the front surface portion of the lower door 62b that stands substantially vertically from the horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 10 (the MAX bet button 11 or the start lever 6 side). Is provided.

  The touch panel unit 201 includes a touch sensor 201b that constitutes a contact input device that can be input by being superimposed on the image display device 201a, and a user interface image corresponding to a player's operation received through the touch sensor 201b. The display of can be switched. The touch sensor 201b operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The touch panel unit 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 201b.

  Speakers 9L and 9R that provide effects such as sound effects and voices are provided on the front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout opening 15 through which medals are paid out is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. A medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid-out medals is provided at the lowermost part of the lower door 62b.

  The lower panel 62b has a front panel sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R and the medal receiving part 16, and a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the model motif. It is attached. The waist panel 25 is irradiated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Display unit structure]
Next, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 5, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet upper portion 61a. As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on an intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping apparatus that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an object that is a screen described later is used. Etc.) and an image corresponding to the production information generated based on the shape is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 7, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that has the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 disposed obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 constitutes an image output unit that outputs an image by irradiation light. The projector mechanism B <b> 2 is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  In addition, exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air is circulated and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out air to the rear, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. The ventilation holes of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly exhaust the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside through the vent hole.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular front surface. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface with the angle adjustment hole B311 as a center. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  A mirror holding part B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding part B313 is formed in the center part, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjustment hole B311 and the attachment hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding part B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and attachment holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331, B341 and the mounting holes B334, B344 in the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311, B311 and the mounting holes B314, B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap with the mirror holding part B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding part B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding part B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are provided on the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, B331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, B331, and B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding unit B11, so that the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror holder B31 Is sandwiched between. And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector holding part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. Thereby, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It can be prevented that the screw head protrudes from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw is destroyed.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally disposed upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 61 of FIG. At the center of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 is formed so as to protrude forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the rear space from the opening of the cabinet 61, and is larger than the width of the rear space. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each side wall B13, B13 is formed so that the width of the second protrusion B131b is wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Accordingly, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

  A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire surface of the porous plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 13, the perforated plate B15 has a front side upper part B15a, a middle side inclined part B15b, and a rear side lower part B15c. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined part B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper part B15a. The lower part B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a and cover the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. Yes. As shown in FIG. 11, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is disposed on the upper side that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that permits the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture that is close to and substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the porous plate B15, and air present in the space portion reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the player's eye position located at the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is looked up from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is not visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 15, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. Thereby, the display unit 100 can unitarily handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen casing C10. As shown in FIG. 16, the screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper side where the irradiation light device B is located are formed. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be shared as a whole, it is possible to share the unit for each plate member of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4. Moreover, since the partial change for each plate member is possible, the specification can be easily changed for each model of the pachislot machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there is a central placement portion C11 disposed at the center, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left-right direction around the center placement portion C11. Yes. These placement parts C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center placement portion C11 places the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. As shown in FIG. 6, when the display unit 100 is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61, the front side portion C <b> 14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301, thereby It is possible to perform backward positioning. The display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side C14. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The opening portions C21 and C31 for operation are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 with the upper door 62a opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screw fastening of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet 61, the operation openings C <b> 21 and C <b> 31 of the display unit 100 are held with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 18, the hand is reached into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the detached display unit 100, and the crank gear E21 that is visible in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door 62a is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates a drive motor F21 as a first accessory driving means that is constituted by an accessory driving means that drives the reel screen driving mechanism F2 as a movable accessory.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 19, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface. The relay substrate CK collects a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and enables wiring with the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that it is disposed in front of the back wall of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10. As shown in FIG. 6, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is disposed below the relay substrate CK, and a signal line of the relay substrate CK is inserted therethrough.

  Thus, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thereby, after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is moved manually, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, reaching out from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 visible in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, screen mechanisms as a plurality of display devices that allow an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so as to switch irradiation targets. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 20, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 21, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided to be rotatable between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image of the irradiated light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and a front exposure position sensor for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. E15b. For example, the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b are each configured by a photosensor.

  In the present embodiment, the front standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. The front standby position corresponds to the first position, and the front exposure position corresponds to the second position. Accordingly, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes a first position sensor, and the front exposure position sensor E15b constitutes a second position sensor.

  The front exposure position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position. The front standby position may correspond to the second position, and the front exposure position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes a second position sensor, and the front exposure position sensor E15b constitutes a first position sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is provided with a reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position. For example, the reel standby position sensor F19 is configured by a photo sensor.

  In the present embodiment, the reel standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. The reel standby position corresponds to the first position. Therefore, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes a first position sensor.

  In the present embodiment, since the reel screen mechanism F1 has a narrow movable range, a reel exposure position sensor is not provided. For example, as with the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. By providing a reel exposure position sensor (not shown) for detecting the presence, the second position sensor may be constituted by the reel exposure position sensor.

  The reel exposure position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position, the reel standby position may correspond to the second position, and the reel exposure position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes a second position sensor, and the reel exposure position sensor constitutes a first position sensor.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists at the standby position. Thereby, interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1, F1 is prevented.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a lower surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  In addition, if the fixed screen mechanism D is a structure which has a reflective surface of several different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, it may have a reflective part of 2 surfaces, 3 surfaces, 5 surfaces, for example, Or you may provide the reflection part of the curved or circular-arc-shaped reflective surface in which the curvature center point located in the front side becomes an angle continuously different with respect to an optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front portion of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to be. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front reflection part D1. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end parts is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection part D1. As a result, the right-side reflection part D2 and the left-side reflection part D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easier to face in the direction of the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light appears in front while the image by the irradiation light appears. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflection part D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while causing an image of the irradiation light to appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, which will be described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is made smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from being blurred due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflection part D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection part D1 in the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 can be reduced, white blur can be reduced while causing an image to appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

  As brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) or L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be expressed by relative values with white as a reference.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If it is lower than the brightness of a surface, it will not specifically limit. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make it black rather than the color of the coating material apply | coated to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the coating material applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material apply | coated to a base material should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only a white pigment among white pigment and black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment (for example, 5 to 25% (or 5% to 25%) (or the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known screen coating material can be appropriately employed, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  Note that the black pigment is not dispersed in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is molded. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the interior of the screen casing C10. It is desirable that the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) disposed in the panel is also lowered. The brightness of these members is desirably lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, it is desirable that the color of the surrounding wall is closer to black.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 23, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support base E12 having patterns such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a projection surface E11a formed in a flat shape so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with irradiation light.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a stepped portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a stepped portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  Accordingly, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  Note that the method for fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening may be employed.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each produced by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The drive motor E25 constitutes a second accessory driving means constituted by an accessory driving means for driving the front screen mechanism E1 as a movable accessory.

  The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is coupled to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 16 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) with the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 26, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint of the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape when viewed from the side. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and the intermediate position E22a and the slide member in the crank member E22. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force is applied in the direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the rotation center position in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The motor shaft gear E24 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor E25. Thereby, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 27 and 29, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is an intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the crank member E22 includes a detection piece E22c for causing the front standby position sensor E15a (see FIG. 21) to detect the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen mechanism E1 as a front exposure position sensor. A detection piece E22d for detection by E15b (see FIG. 21) is formed.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is a stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and is gradually increased to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 28). After the maximum speed is reached, the vehicle gradually decelerates and becomes the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached.

  Thus, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overloading of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  The front screen mechanism E1 in the front standby position that is in the standby posture and the front exposure position that is in the exposure posture corresponds to a stationary position that can be stopped even in a non-excited state where the drive motor E25 is not excited. That is, the front standby position corresponds to the first stationary position, and the front exposure position corresponds to the second stationary position. The front standby position may be the second stationary position, and the front exposure position may be the first stationary position.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. Yes.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 is formed with a pattern at the peripheral edge, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 have protrusions (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes in the horizontal direction outside the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 at the reel standby position and the reel exposure position corresponds to a stationary position that can be stopped even in a non-excited state in which the drive motor F21 is not excited. That is, the reel standby position corresponds to the first stationary position, and the reel exposure position corresponds to the second stationary position. The reel standby position may be the second stationary position, and the reel exposure position may be the first stationary position.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Production by screen device)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) It is possible to execute an effect using a certain video display and an effect using a curved video display.

  For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image appears on the flat projection surface E11a, thereby distorting when irradiating the irradiation light. An image with no image can appear, and an effect using this planar image can be executed.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflection portions of the fixed screen mechanism D cause a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect). It is possible to cause a video with a depth to appear and to perform an effect using the video with a sense of depth.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by causing the image to appear on the reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, A curved image can appear, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display example of touch panel unit]
Next, a display screen displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a part of a display screen displayed on the image display device 201a. As shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed on the image display device 201a. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the player's operation received via the touch sensor 201b of the touch panel unit 201.

  The top screen 211 is an initial screen among display screens displayed on the touch panel unit 201, and displays a MENU button 211a and an outline game history 211b. The MENU button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The outline game history 211b displays a part of the game history (outline game history) in the game history in the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

  The menu screen 212 is a display screen menu displayed on the touch panel unit 201. The return button 212a, the record button 212b, the explanation button 212c, the array payout button 212d, the reach eye button 212e, and the WEB site button 212f. And a volume button 212g. The return button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 when operated by the player. In addition, the record button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling a corresponding display screen when operated by the player.

  For example, when the record button 212b is operated by the player, a recording operation screen 216 regarding recording of information related to the game (hereinafter simply referred to as “game information”) as shown in FIG. 31 is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service has been widely used in which players are registered for each model, and various game information such as the achievement status of a defined mission is managed from the player's previous game history. Yes. A recording operation screen 216 called by the recording button 212b is an operation screen related to this service.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the recording operation screen 216 displays a recording start button 216a, a recording reference button 216b, a recording end button 216c, a registration button 216d, a return button 216e, and a MENU button 216f. .

  The recording start button 216a is an operation button for starting recording of game information. When the recording start button 216a is operated, the identification information of the pachislot machine 1 and a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) representing the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the server are displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone, the mobile terminal can register the combination of the pachislot machine 1 and the user in the server.

  The record reference button 216b is an operation button for referring to game information. When the record reference button 216b is operated, a two-dimensional code representing recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can display the recorded game information directly or via a server. When the record reference button 216b is operated, the recorded game information may be displayed on the image display device 201a or the like.

  The recording end button 216c is an operation button for ending the recording of game information. When the record end button 216c is operated, the game information recording is ended, and a two-dimensional code representing the recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can register the recorded game information in the server.

  The registration button 216d is an operation button for registering the user with the service. When the registration button 216d is operated, a two-dimensional code representing the URL of the server is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can access a site for registering the user with the service. The return button 216e and the MENU button 216f are operation buttons for displaying the menu screen 211 and the menu screen 212 on the touch panel unit 201.

  In FIG. 30, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, descriptions of the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, an array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence (payout table) between a combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachislot machine 1 and a privilege when determined to be a winning, or a symbol drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Columns (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

  When the reach eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. Reach eyes in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eye screen. The reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the active line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 is used. This is a combination of symbols. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of reach-lip patterns is displayed along the active line, a state (for example, a bonus state, normal ART or CT (for example, FIG. (See 36))).

  When the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating a URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1 Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

  When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachislot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

  Here, since the touch panel unit 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs an effect, the touch panel unit 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (that is, the effect is being performed by the display unit 100). Even if it exists, the display of the image display apparatus 201a of the touch panel unit 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, there is a case where it is desired to know a character appearing in an effect on the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call up the explanation screen, and the relationship between the characters can be obtained. It can be grasped during the game. Further, from the viewpoint of the player, there is a case where it is desired to grasp a symbol to be used as a guide for winning a rare combination during reel rotation when a so-called rare combination is won. The reel arrangement can be grasped by operating and calling the array payout screen.

  The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display a detailed game history including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game histories of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a MENU button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the MENU button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen when operated by the player. When the previous button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. The game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (games) in the pachislot machine 1.

  The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a MENU button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the MENU button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. The game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) entry and success in the pachislot machine 1. As will be described later, in this embodiment, since CZ1 has CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3, the game history 214e displays the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ3.

  The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a MENU button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the MENU button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 215e displays the number of wins of the so-called small role in the pachislot machine 1 and the winning probability (the fraction in which the numerator is 1).

  The display screen displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on an operation button displayed on each display screen, or based on a swipe operation on the display screen. It is good also as switching.

[Electric configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 disposed in the cabinet 61 and a sub control board 72 disposed in the lower door 62b. The main control board 71 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44b of the power supply device 44. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and receives signals output from the main control board 71 to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R. Relay.

  The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R change the design by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, that is, the start lever 6 being operated by the player (start operation). Let The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R constitute a symbol changing means. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external concentration terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 71 through the cabinet-side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 61 and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4 and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 passes through a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The door relay terminal plate 54 is connected to the medal insertion slot 22 and a medal sensor 46 disposed on a medal selector (not shown) disposed on the back side of the lower door 62b, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a checkout. A switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub-relay board 69 are connected.

  That is, if it is determined that the flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process. If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the start command reception process. The medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66 and the sub relay board 69 are connected to the main control board via the door relay terminal board 54. 71 is connected.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that the medal has passed through a selector (not shown) and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62 a and the lower door 62 b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 11 and the 1 bet button have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The medal sensor 46 and the MAX bet button 11 constitute a game medium detection unit that detects the insertion of a game medium.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71.

  The stop switch substrate 65 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with stop switches 17S corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The stop switch 17S is applied to a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that detect that the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player. The corresponding stop switch 17S constitutes stop operation detecting means.

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. For example, the LED 70 lights a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. That is, the sub-relay board 69 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 72, the sound I / O board 81, the LED board 82, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, the touch sensor 201b, and the projector mechanism B2. Has been.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 69 from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one direction by serial communication. Further, the sub control board 72 is connected to the sound I / O board 81, the LED board 82, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the touch sensor 201b, the projector mechanism B2, and the drive motor E25 via the sub relay board 69. And a drive motor F21, a chance switch 35 as an effect operation detecting means for detecting depression of the chance button 33, a front standby position sensor E15a, a front exposure position sensor E15b, and a reel standby position sensor F19. It is connected. The drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 are configured by a two-phase excitation type stepping motor.

  The sound I / O board 81 outputs sound to the speakers 9L and 9R. The LED board 82 displays the blinking pattern by causing the LEDs included in the LED group 75 to emit light according to the effects executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 34).

  The LED group 75 includes a reel back lamp (not shown) that is arranged to illuminate a symbol row drawn on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and includes a plurality of full-color LEDs, decoration LEDs 23a and 23b, and a chance button. The LED 34 is also included.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 has a sensor (not shown) for detecting opening / closing of the lower door 62b attached to the frame of the lower door 62b, and based on the state of the sensor (for example, if the sensor is on) Open / close history of the lower door 62b is saved.

  Further, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 sends a signal indicating that the lower door 62b has been opened in order to display an error on the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a when the lower door 62b is opened. (Sub control circuit 101).

  In addition, because of the door opening / closing structure of the pachislot machine 1, the upper door 62a is locked with the lower door 62b closed so that the upper door 62a cannot be opened unless the lower door 62b is opened. The sensor which detects opening and closing is not attached.

  Thus, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the front standby position sensor E15a, the front exposure position sensor E15b, and the reel standby position sensor F19 are detected by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1 due to an error, and the hopper device 43 A sensor (not shown) for detecting an abnormality and the medal sensor 46 constitute error detection means for detecting an error by the main control circuit 91.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a video relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing a control program executed by the sub CPU 102 and production image (video), sound, light (LED group 75) and communication data.

  The video relay board 77 is a board that converts and relays video signals transmitted from the sub-control board 72 to the projector mechanism B2 and the image display apparatus 201a according to the signal standards of the projector mechanism B2 and the image display apparatus 201a.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a main control circuit 91 serving as a main control unit includes a microcomputer 92 installed on a main control board 71 as a main component, and controls the progress of the game. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96 and a random number generator 98 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 generates a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The main CPU 93 outputs a pulse to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by detecting reel indexes (not shown) provided on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively. Count the number of times. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and a light sensor and a light receiving unit by rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detector (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared to a predetermined value (for example, 0) when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a simple design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the sub-control circuit 101 as the sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the content of the presentation is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 And the like, and controls peripheral devices such as the projector mechanism B2, the LED group 75, and the speakers 9L and 9R. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a VRAM 105 that also functions as a frame buffer, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in accordance with the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task (not shown) for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and a random number for production are extracted, and production contents (production data) are determined and registered. Effect content determination processing (see FIG. 107) executed from the main board communication task for this purpose. The sub CPU 102 that executes the effect content determination process constitutes an effect determination unit and an effect execution unit.

  Further, the control program includes an accessory control task for controlling the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 as movable accessories based on the effect content determined in the effect content determination process, and an effect content determination process. A main task for mainly controlling the display of video by the display unit 100 (see FIG. 2) and the touch panel unit 201 based on the determined contents of production, an LED control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 75, and the speaker 9L. , A voice control task for controlling sound output by 9R, and the like.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, amplifier data relating to light on / off patterns, a storage area for storing accessory data relating to the operation of movable accessories (see FIG. 79), and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 stores a storage area for registering the effect content and effect data determined in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 107), a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91, A backup storage area is provided for storing the gaming state, the internal winning combination, etc. transmitted from the main CPU 93 and the gaming information displayed on the gaming information screens 213, 214, and 215.

  That is, the game information displayed on the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 is stored by a backup power source (not shown) even when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is off. The played game information is maintained.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the VRAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the display unit 100 or the image display device 201a.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 9L and 9R to output sounds such as BGM in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effects. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 75 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 by the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 in accordance with the accessory data designated by the effect contents.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is a state where the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated, and the bonus state. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  Whether or not a bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95, and whether or not a bonus is activated is determined by a game state flag provided in the main RAM 95. Management is based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is an internal winning combination related to replay. Is a gaming state in which the probability determined as a medium probability is medium. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

  These RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags, an RT1 gaming state flag to an RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing on / off of these flags by the main RAM 95. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag that is on as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT gaming state flags are OFF, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 35, (1) when the bonus winning combination (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 changes from the bonus non-winning state to the flag-to-flag state. Transition state. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state when (2) a bonus-related combination is won in the inter-flag state.

  Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state when the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number (216) is paid out in (3) bonus state, and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 (4) transitions the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when 20 games have elapsed, and (5) displays the bell spilling points before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spillage is displayed.

  In addition, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the (6) RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) transitions the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the bell spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. When a spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Here, the bell spilled eyes are determined for each push order bell type when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) to be described later are determined as internal winning combinations. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, RT2 transition lip is not in the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip when a later-described maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, RT3 transition lip is the order of pressing determined for each RT3 lip type when RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition lip is determined in the order of pressing determined for each RT4 lip type when an RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to do so. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays a game so as to shift from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to an ART gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Become.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not win for ART among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 36, the general gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states with different game states at the transition destination. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal game state shifts to the CZ, and the CZ shifts to the ART game state. A game is performed.

  The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state shifts to CZ. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery for transition to CZ is performed. (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to CZ.

  CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with high expectation for transitioning to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of transitioning from CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, a lottery for transitioning to ART is performed. (B) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state. When winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) through the ART preparation.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an RT is won among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 35, since the RT4 gaming state transitions from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART is won. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART is determined as being prepared for ART, and a stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is notified during the ART preparation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an ART is won in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 36, the ART gaming state is normally composed of ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states having different game characteristics, and normal ART displays a stop operation (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out) for a predetermined number of games. And a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and adds an additional duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. In addition, during CT, a game is normally performed without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility that the normal ART shifts to the CT or the general gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed. (D) When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed, and (E) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Although the normal ART duration management method is arbitrary, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration based on the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals or the number of medals paid out during normal ART, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation) The duration may be managed according to the number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CT to normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 67).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility that a transition is made from the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, (2) when a bonus role is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

  In the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (G) If the winning lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the game state has shifted from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control board 71 does not change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). ) To shift the gaming state). Further, when (H) the winning lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is completed, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for the ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via the route.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The design types are “White 7”, “Blue 7”, “Chile 1”, “Chile 2”, “Chile”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”. And “Cactus 3”.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37 assigns the symbol located at the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the 3C and 3R rotation directions.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Also, as shown in FIG. 37, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 37 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “white 7”, “blue 7”, “top 1”, “top 2”, “bottom”, “replay”, “hat” ”,“ Cactus 1 ”,“ Cactus 2 ”and“ Cactus 3 ”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned to the “Chile top 1” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for “Chile top 2”, “Chile bottom”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” (symbol codes 4 to 10) , “00000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, a winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, re-playing (replay) operation, and bonus game (servant continuous differential device) operation. In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored and a “data (bit corresponding to a symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage region” Data for designating “)” is defined. In the present embodiment, each symbol combination is discriminated by using 22 1-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” illustrated in FIG. 38 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Each combination is defined with a combination name corresponding to the role of the combination and the type of symbol constituting the combination.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 40, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals are paid out.

  The content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 38, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the active line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 35). ).

  Further, the combination names “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition B_02” are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the active line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

  The combination names “C_maintenance lip A_01” to “C_maintenance lip G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on any one of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Further, the combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “Replay-Replay-Replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

  Further, the combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 transition reply. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

  Further, the combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

  Further, the combination names “C_Chilli Lip A_01” to “C_1 Chilli Lip D_01” are Chile Lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which a chile symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, the symbol “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chilli bottom” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile symbol is a name when the symbol “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chile bottom” are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Of the chili lips, the combination name “C_chili lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which the chile symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes referred to as a “single dust”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_chili lip B_01” and “C_chili lip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chile symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. In the following, it may be referred to as a “two-line chili lip”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_Chilli lip D_01” to “C_1 correct chili lip D_01” are combinations of symbols (or the corresponding) This is a symbol combination that is displayed when a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination fails (so-called “missing eye”), and may be hereinafter referred to as “triple lip”.

  Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lips. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special symbol combination is displayed on the display window 4. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach lip is displayed along the active line, the re-game is activated.

  In addition, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in the BB. When 9 out of BBs are displayed along the active line, 9 medals are paid out. Of the 9 BB appearances, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols (designs) on any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. “White 7” or “Blue 7”) is a combination of symbols displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination is failed), Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “seven in BB”. On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. Sometimes called.

  The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which “hat-hat-hat” is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When a bell is displayed along the active line, nine medals are paid out.

  The combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first ones. When the first item is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are the final outcomes. When a confirmed outcome is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the active line, three medals are paid out. Also, the combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the active line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 42 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 43 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the combination to which the lottery is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random values that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables in the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 42, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and winning probabilities determined as internal winning combinations in the respective gaming states are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_Chill Lip (No. 25)” to “F_Leach Eye Lip D (No. 31)” are internal in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Without being determined as a winning combination, it is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when “F_chililip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, a specific control (described later) This flag conversion will be described later.

  Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, “F_reach eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3-6, No. 15-18), “F_reach eye lip AD” is not determined as an internal winning combination alone. Therefore, when “F_reach eye lip A to D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state (from the player, the combination of symbols corresponding to “F_reach eye lip A to D” is When displayed, the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, the bonus-related combination is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 43, the winning combination relating to the carry-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 44 to FIG. 49 are comparison tables showing a correspondence relationship with combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the active line in the combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped from rotating so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 45 to 51, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when a combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even combinations of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, stop control (for example, a drawing to be preferentially drawn) is made different depending on a combination of symbols that can be stopped and the current gaming state. Even a combination of symbols with a mark may not be displayed. Accordingly, FIGS. 50 and 51 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination during non-flagging and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols displayed to be stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, “push order combination”, which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) is different, is provided as a plurality of combinations. 50. The symbol combination associated with the “push order correct answer” in FIG. 50 is a symbol combination advantageous for the player among the symbol combinations displayed in accordance with the push order, and corresponds to the “push order incorrect answer”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “pressing correct answer” is displayed. Even in the ART gaming state, the push order that is incorrect may be notified, but details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order represents the push order that is the correct answer.
Specifically, the end “1st” of the name of the combination means that the correct pressing order is that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the end “2nd” of the name of the combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the last “3rd” in the name of the combination is the correct push order and the first stop operation is the right reel. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the name of the role means that the correct order of pushing is “left, middle, right”, and the end of the name of the role “132” is that where the correct order is “left”. , “Right, middle” means that the end of the name of the role “213” means that the correct answer is “middle, left, right”, and the end of the name of the role “231”. Means that the correct order of pushing is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the combination “F_Chilli lip” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, FIG. 44 of the Chili lip (see FIG. 38). When any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 49 is displayed along the active line, and the pressing order is not correct, the replay (see FIG. 38) in FIG. 44 to FIG. Any of the displayed displayable symbol combinations is displayed along the active line. 44 to 49, the role “F_Chillilip” cannot display the triple chililip (“C_Chillilip D_01” to “C_1 correct chililip D_01”), and can display the single chililip or the double chililip (“C_Chillilip”). A_01 ”,“ C_Chillilip B_01 ”, and“ C_Chillilip C_01 ”) can be displayed. That is, the combination “F_Chillilip” is a combination that cannot display a triple Chililip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, When any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the active line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 44 to 44 in the replay (see FIG. 38). One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 49 is displayed along the active line. 44 to 49, it can be seen that the combinations “F_accurate dust” and “F_1 accurate dust” can display triple dust. In other words, the combination “F_acceptance lip” or “F_1 accuracy lip” is a role that can display a triple lip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip ( One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. 49 in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 is displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, replay (FIG. 38), one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the effective line.

  Note that the correct answer push order in the roles “F_Chile Lip”, “F_Challeng Lip”, “F_1 Chilli Lip” and “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” may be arbitrary. In this embodiment, the pushing order in which the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L is the correct pushing order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination “F_reach eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach lip is displayed. Will be.

  For the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip A” and “F_Maintenance Lip B”, any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. It is displayed along. In addition, the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the replay is performed (see FIG. 38). 44-49 of any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed are displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 38) 44 to 49 are displayed along the active line.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_1rd” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition Lip (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 in the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition Lip (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 in the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the pressing order. If the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 40). Is displayed along the active line, and when the pressing order is not correct, a bell spilled eye (refer to FIG. 38) or a single item (refer to FIGS. 40 and 41) is displayed.

  For the combination “F_common bell”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 among the bells (see FIG. 40) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. In addition, the combinations “F_Cabo 1” and “F_Cabo 2” indicate that any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. Displayed.

  In addition, for the combination “weak chilli”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 41) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. For the combinations “F_Strong Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 41) is valid regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence relationship between winning combination between flags and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols to be displayed in a stopped state (some of the combinations are omitted). In particular, BB (“C_BB1” is displayed during the inter-flag state. “C_BB2”) is displayed. In FIG. 51, “◯” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “X” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  In addition, when BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols according to the combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combination of symbols displayed in accordance with the combination other than the combination related to the bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_Chillilip”, BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_Chillilip” in FIG. 50 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, it is possible to display only the combination of symbols displayed in the correct push order shown in FIG. 50, or to display only the combination of symbols displayed in the incorrect push order. It may be.

  For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” in FIG. 50 is displayed. In this case, only the bells that are displayed when the pressing order is correct may be displayed, and the bell spilled or the first sheet that is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may not be displayed. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1 + F_RT3 Lip_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition lip displayed when the pressing order is correct may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, when the bonus-related combination and any of “out of”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of the winning role>
As described above, the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols to be stopped is described. Subsequently, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and the like will be described. However, in the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated, the data table The abbreviations for the winning combination will be described before the explanation. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing abbreviations for winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called the role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are called the roles “push order bell”, The role “F_Common Bell” is called the role “Common Bell”, the roles “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Cabo 2” are called the role “Cactus”, the role “F_Weak Chile” is called the role “Weak Cherry”, and the role “F_Strong” “Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2” are called “Strong Cherry”.

  In addition, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” are called “Triple Chile Lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “Replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are called “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state, any of “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chick Lip”, “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” is an internal winning combination. Is determined, flag conversion lottery is performed. And in the pachislot machine 1, when winning this flag conversion lottery, a special privilege (for example, adding the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

  As shown in FIG. 50, for the combinations “F_acceptance lip” and “F_1 accuracy lip”, a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” is displayed when the pressing order is correct, and a combination of “replay” is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. Is displayed. When the pachislot machine 1 wins the flag conversion lottery, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” are treated as the “Triple Chilli Lip”, and the information for displaying the symbol combination of “Triple Chilli Lip” is displayed. (For example, press down to target the Chile symbol). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combinations “F_Challenged Lip” and “F_1 Chick Lip” are treated as “Replay” and information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” is notified (for example, , The push order other than the forward push is notified).

  Similarly, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed at the correct pressing order and the combination of "replay" at the incorrect pressing order Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when winning the flag conversion lottery, the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are treated as the role “reach eye lip”, and the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is used. Information to be displayed is notified (for example, the symbol “white 7” is aimed by pressing forward). On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” by treating the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” as the role “replay”. Is notified.

  By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when winning the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols of “three-line chili lip” or “reach eye lip” is displayed and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is given in response to winning the flag conversion lottery, but from the player, a special privilege is given by displaying the combination of “triple chili lip” symbols. You will feel granted.

  In order to improve the gameability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state. Since stop control (combination of displayed symbols) varies depending on the type of internal winning combination, as a method of varying the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which a privilege is given depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is varied. (In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be varied depending on whether the bonus is activated or the RT gaming state. For example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. In addition, other game states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state may be provided). However, since the opportunity to change the winning combination probability (RT gaming state transition opportunity) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination, by performing notification based on the flag conversion lottery and the lottery result, The appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which can be given can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination to which the privilege is given can be increased. On the contrary, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbol to which the privilege is given The appearance frequency of can be lowered.

  In the following description, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Challenging Lip” will be determined by winning the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. "Chilip" is sometimes referred to as "converting to Chilelip" (or simply "triple lip"), and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations Winning the flag conversion lottery of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to “reach eye lip” (or simply converted to “reach eye lip”). There is.

<Sub flag conversion table>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, because of the restriction, the main control board 71 cannot directly send the internal winning combination to the sub control circuit 101. Therefore, based on the sub flag conversion table as shown in FIG. A sub-flag that groups the winning combination is added to the start command and sent.

  In the sub-flag conversion table as shown in FIG. 53, “out” as an internal winning combination is associated with “0” as a sub-flag indicating “losing”. “F_Chilelip” as an internal winning combination is associated with “1” as a sub-flag indicating “Double Chile”.

  “F_acceptance lip” as an internal winning combination is associated with “2” as a sub-flag indicating “triple dust A”. “F — 1 Chilli Lip” as an internal winning combination is associated with “3” as a subflag indicating “Triple Chilli B”.

  “F_reach eye lip A” as an internal winning combination is associated with “4” as a subflag indicating “reach eye lip 1”. “F_reach eye lip B” as an internal winning combination is associated with “5” as a subflag indicating “reach eye lip 2”.

  “F_reach eye lip C” as an internal winning combination is associated with “6” as a subflag indicating “reach eye lip 3”. “F_reach eye lip D” as an internal winning combination is associated with “7” as a sub-flag indicating “reach eye lip 4”.

  “F_Maintenance Lip A” and “F_Maintenance Lip B” as the internal winning combination are associated with “8” as a subflag indicating “Replay”. “F_Maintenance Lip_1st”, “F_Maintenance Lip_2nd” and “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” as the internal winning combination are associated with “9” as a subflag indicating “Push Order Lip 1”.

  “F_RT3 Lip_1st”, “F_RT3 Lip_213”, “F_RT3 Lip_231”, and “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” as the internal winning combination are associated with “10” as a sub flag indicating “Push Order Lip 2”.

  “F_RT4 Lip_123”, “F_RT4 Lip_132”, “F_RT4 Lip_2nd”, and “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” as the internal winning combination are associated with “11” as a subflag indicating “Push Order Lip 3”.

  “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd” and “F_3 option bell_3rd” as the internal winning combination are associated with “12” as a sub-flag indicating “push order bell”. “F_common bell” as an internal winning combination is associated with “13” as a subflag indicating “common bell”.

  “F_Cabo 1”, “F_Cabo 2”, “F_RB combination 1”, “F_RB combination 2”, “F_RB combination 3”, and “F_RB combination 4” as the internal winning combination are sub-flags indicating “cactus”. 14 ”.

  “F_Weak Chile” as an internal winning combination is associated with “15” as a sub-flag indicating “Weak Chile”. “F_Strong Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2” as the internal winning combination are associated with “16” as a subflag indicating “Strong Chile”.

“F_special 1” and “F_special 2” as internal winning combinations are associated with “17” as subflags indicating “reach eye 1”. “F_special 3” as an internal winning combination is associated with “18” as a subflag indicating “reach eye 2”.

[Flow of game during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the general gaming state CZ, and then the general gaming state CZ is changed to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 36). FIG. 54A is a diagram showing a game flow when the normal game state in the general game state shifts to CZ in the general game state.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as the CZ lottery state. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states having different degrees of expectation for winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state wins the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. Note that when the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the CZ (see FIG. 36).

  The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZ (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone that must win an ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lotteries with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state, the CZ that shifts from the normal gaming state is lottery among these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Next, FIG. 54 (B) is a diagram showing a game flow when transitioning from the general gaming state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which a lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, a six-level mode is used as the rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues for the first number of games (for example, a maximum of 12 games), and performs mode promotion lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ1.

  Also, during CZ2, ten points are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues for the second number of games (for example, a maximum of 15 games), and performs a lottery promotion for points based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ2.

  In the second half of CZ1, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character A battle each other. In the second half of CZ2, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character B battle each other. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, a maximum of 4 games), and wins and losses are managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the player wins the ART lottery, the teammate character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on each game and an internal winning combination, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during a battle performance, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle performance is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the latter half battle effect, and basically, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if CZ1 or CZ2 wins the ART, the player wins in the second half battle effect, and then the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, freezing may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via the ART preparation).

  Next, FIG. 54 (C) is a diagram showing a flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ3 to the ART gaming state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs ART lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game through ART preparation. In CZ3, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state is shifted from the next game to the CT (additional chance zone) via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed while the ART lottery in CZ3 has not been won, the game state shifts to normal ART via ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during the general gaming state]
Next, a data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal medium-to-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 55 is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery in the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the CZ lottery state is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the CZ lottery state is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ or ART. FIG. 55A is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of the CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal gaming state. FIG. 55B is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state at the end of the bonus, and is referred to when the setting is changed, at the end of the bonus, or at the end of CZ, ART.

  The normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55A defines lottery value information regarding the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and winning combination.

  The various data tables shown below conceptually show lottery value information. In the figure, “0” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “extremely low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0% to less than 1%” is set. “Low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 1% to 10%” is prescribed, and “Low” means a lottery probability “10%”. Means that a lottery value corresponding to “less than 30%” is defined, “medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 30% to less than 60%” is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “very high” means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. Means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “99% to less than 100%” is prescribed. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  In the various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Is called.

  Referring to the normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. . In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it is understood that any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry is determined as the internal winning combination, thereby maintaining the high probability. .

  The normal middle / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the CZ lottery state after the transition according to the situation when referring. Referring to the normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 55 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
56 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 56A is a CZ lottery table used when CZ lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination during a normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery on whether or not to pull back CZ when CZ fails or when ART ends.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56A defines lottery value information related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than when it has a low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (B) defines lottery value information related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. When the CZ fails (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART gaming state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG.

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 57 is a CZ1 medium mode up lottery table used for CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The mode up lottery table during CZ1 defines lottery value information on the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 59A described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the mode goes up. The lottery result “mode 1 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 2. That is, in the situation where the current mode is “2”, when “mode 2 UP” is won, the mode of CZ1 is increased from “2” to “4”. In addition, when a lottery result “Mode 6 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze occurs, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 58 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The point lottery table in CZ2 defines lottery value information about the result of the point up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 59B, which will be described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the point increases, and when the point increases to 10, the ART lottery is always won. In addition, “point 2 UP” of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, when the current point is “2” and the player wins “point 2 UP”, the point of CZ2 is “ It will rise from “2” to “4”. In addition, when the lottery result “Point 10 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze is generated, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIGS. 59 and 60 are CZ ART lottery tables used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 59A is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1) used for the first game in the latter half of CZ1. 59B is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ2) used for the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 59C shows the CZ used for the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 59 (D) is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 59 (A) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current mode. In addition, the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current point. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table during CZ shown in FIG. 59C (common for CZ1 and CZ2 during the latter half battle) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (CZ1, CZ2 common for the latter half of the battle), if a rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the latter half of CZ1, CZ2, You can see that you win the ART lottery with a probability.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 60 (D) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games and the internal winning combination of CZ3. Referring to the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ3), it can be seen that during CZ3, winning an ART lottery will always win CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the flow of games during normal ART will be described. The pachislot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as the ART gaming state (see FIG. 36), and the CT is added as a chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the normal ART, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT. FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a flow of lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lotteries performed during normal ART. The ART level is provided in four stages from level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. The ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and extremely high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. The CT lottery state affects a CT lottery performed during normal ART and a flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state), the roles “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Challenging Lip”, “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Leaching” are performed. When any of the “eye lips D” is determined as an internal winning combination alone, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an additional number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 61 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion lottery with reference to the ART level and CT lottery state during normal ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given and a notification (for example, in order) is displayed for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and a symbol combination of “reach eye lip”. Notification that a predetermined pattern is aimed at by pressing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “replay” (for example, notification of a pressing order other than a forward pressing) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” or a symbol of “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table used during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 62 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this first stage flag conversion lottery is won, Thereafter, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery of the second stage is won, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” are converted to “Triple Chile Lip”, and the flag conversion lottery of the first stage or the flag conversion lottery of the second stage. If it is not won, it is treated as “replay” without converting the roles “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” to “triple lip”.

  62A is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 62B is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 62 (A) defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip”, and for the roles “F_Leaching Lip A” to “F_Leaching Lip D” Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 62 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. Until the CT is won once in normal ART, the “first time (until CT wins once)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), in each of the flag conversion lottery table during ART, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as a lottery performed using random numbers in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it has been required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to playing balls, which has conventionally been performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the capacity while reducing the capacity.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 256536 can be lottered by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and CT lottery status for the second stage lottery, flag conversion lottery can be performed not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current state. A flag conversion lottery can be performed.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 63 is an ART level determination table used for determining the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of ART winning when the transition to the ART gaming state is determined and during normal ART. FIG. 63A is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 63B is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 57, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63 (B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuing games in the normal ART. Also, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63 (B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuing games in the normal ART at the time of CT entry. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continued games, and the ART level also shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a normal ART medium high probability lottery table for lottering the CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium / high probability lottery table defines lottery value information about the CT lottery state of the transfer destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. Referring to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chili rips (winning“ F_definite chili lip ”“ F_1 definite chili lip ”wins flag conversion lottery at the time of winning)” In “A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, winning the flag conversion lottery), it can be seen that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to “low probability”. In the above description, a special privilege is given when the flag conversion lottery is won. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, contrary to the above description, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” and “reach eye lip” must win the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, a special privilege called CT winning is still given.

<Cart lottery table during ART>
FIG. 65 is a CT lottery table during ART used for CT lottery during normal ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines lottery value information about the lottery result of CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “triple chili lip”, “reach eye lip” and “BB” are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using a random value. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using random numbers in the range of probability denominator 65536.

  The pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and “highly accurate CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Is easily added (see FIG. 70).

<Normal lottery table during ART>
FIG. 66 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for extra lottery to add the number of ART games during normal ART. The extra lottery table during the normal ART defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of games during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by one set of 8 games. During CT, the lottery of the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination. When the winning lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Is done. For this reason, a game in which the number of ART games is added does not end during the CT, and is ended when a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is performed eight times.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), when the winning combination “three consecutive chilis” is won during CT (that is, when winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning “F_exact chili” and “F_1 probable chili”) ) One set of 8 games is reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is played seven times, the CT will be terminated if a game in which the number of ART games is not added once is performed, but the role “Triple Chile Lip” If the player wins, the CT is reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the combination “Triple Chile Lip” wins.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 67 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the “triple chilling”. As described above, if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won during CT, CT will be reset. Therefore, if the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, CT will be restarted. Will be set.

  On the other hand, for the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67C, table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, and table 2 Has the highest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”. In addition, when the winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, CT is newly given as shown in FIG. 71 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (C), in normal CT, a table is determined based on the ART level. In the case of high probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 68 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for flag conversion lottery out of three stages of tables. The intra-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information for a table used for flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed. When the CT lottery table is determined to win the CT lottery and shift to the CT, or is referred to at the start of CT, the table used for flag conversion lottery during CT is determined.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during CT, it can be seen that during the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the winning “triple chilli lip”.

<Casting lottery table during CT>
FIG. 70 is an extra lottery table during CT used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combinations other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 70 are not won in the extra lottery during CT.

  In addition, in the extra lottery during the normal CT, the number of extra games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” is won. Specifically, when the number of winning the “three-line chili lip” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, “10 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT When the number of wins for the role “Triple Chile Lip” is “9-16 times”, “20 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and the number of times that the “Triple Chile Lip” is won during the same CT Is “17 to 24 times”, it is easy to determine “30 games” as the number of additional games, and when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili rips” during the same CT is “25 times or more” In addition, “50 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, The number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of wins for the “3 consecutive Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “9 times or more”, the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” of the 3 “Chile Repeat” in the figure is “ Promoted to “20 games”. Further, when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” in the same CT becomes “17 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “very high” and “very low” of the “3 consecutive chili lip” in the figure. The number of added games is promoted to “30 games”. Similarly, if the number of wins for the “Triple Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “25 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “Extremely High” and “Extremely Low” of the “Triple Chile Lip” in the figure. The number of additional games to be promoted is promoted to “50 games”.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per time is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “triple chili lip” is won during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT will not end, and CT will be reset if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won. The more you continue, the more you can expect the additional amount per time to increase, and the interest during CT will improve.
In addition, the number of times to increase the additional amount per time is more (9 times or more) than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT. Can be prevented, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with additional number of sets during CT>
FIG. 71 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets in CT used for the lottery for adding a new CT during CT. The set number extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 71, when a winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given as a result of adding the number of sets, a new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed ends.

  The number of wins for the above-mentioned “Triple Chile Lip” is counted only during the same CT, but this “In the same CT” is when a lottery is won by adding the number of sets performed during CT. It is good also as including the new CT provided to, and not including it.

[Game flow in bonus state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the flow of the game during the bonus state will be described. FIG. 72 (A) is a diagram showing a game flow in the case of shifting to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 72 (B) is a case of shifting to the bonus state during the normal ART. FIG. 72 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow when a transition is made to a bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 72A to 72C, the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type at the transition to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after completing the bonus state, the process proceeds to CT via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow differs depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 72 (A), when the normal gaming state is shifted to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB. If this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is ended, the state shifts to normal ART through the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 72B, when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery is won with a probability of 50%, and if it is won, it will shift to CT via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state, and if it is not won, it will transfer to the normal ART via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

  Referring to FIG. 72 (C), when the transition from CT to normal BB or special BB is performed, the transition to CT is made via ART preparations after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Next, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a bonus type lottery table for determining the bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus table with bonus ART games added>
FIG. 74 is an extra lottery table for bonus ART games used for the lottery and the ART game number extra lottery performed during the bonus state. The bonus ART game number extra lottery table defines the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value information regarding the extra game number in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The lottery table added with the number of bonus ART games is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the ART lottery is won in the normal BB shifted from the general gaming state). In other words, when 1 or more (in reality, at least 50 games) are determined as the number of additional games in the ART non-winning state, an ART lottery is won and a corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the ART win, the bonus ART game number addition lottery table is used for the ART game number addition lottery.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 75 is a bonus lottery CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before the transition to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 75, for example, when a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is found that a CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow in the general gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by performing notification during the RT4 gaming state, and the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed as shown in FIG. doing. As shown in FIG. 50, the combination of symbols for transitioning the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the player's stop operation. In some cases, the RT4 gaming state may be entered accidentally.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, since the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be determined as internal winning combinations, even in the general gaming state (non-ART) A reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the game mode is changed to the RT4 game state accidentally during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed. When it becomes possible, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, the flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notice for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is given and the ART right is granted. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the “replay” symbol combination is performed, and control is performed so that the symbol combination “reach eye lip” is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 77 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed in the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, the stop operation information (push order, etc.) is reported under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the player's profit. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information is provided on the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. To do.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 78, the main control board 71 notifies the stop operation information by displaying numerical values “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. “1” means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and “2” means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “3”. Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, “4” to “9” indicate the pressing order to be notified respectively, “4” means that the pressing order is “left, middle, right”, and “5” indicates that the pressing order is “ “6” means “middle, left, right”, and “7” means “middle, right, left”. “8” means that the push order is “right, left, middle”, and “9” means that the push order is “right, middle, left”.

  Further, “10” and “11” notify the bonus-related combination, and “10” means a symbol combination “C_BB1” composed of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, and “11”. Means a symbol combination “C_BB2” composed of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”. Although not shown in FIG. 78, “0” means that notification is not performed, and no numerical value is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Here, although the numerical values “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, it is not always possible for all players to clearly understand the notification content. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by some players just by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 notifies the details of the stop operation on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 that is controlled by the sub-control board 72, and notifies the stop operation information under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. “1” is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when the pressing order “middle, left, right” is notified, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When “F_BB1” is determined as an internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed, and a symbol to be aimed at is notified to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (A), during the ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi”, and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. “Bell Navi” informs the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “bell”. Further, “Maintenance Lip Navi” notifies the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination “Replay”. In addition, “RT3 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combination “F_RT3 transition Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols “RT3 transition Lip”. In addition, “RT4 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combinations “F_RT4 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “RT4 transition Lip”.

  Note that the timing of notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when the start operation is received, or notification on the main side may be performed when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed. It is good also as notifying on the main side at the timing which received either. On the other hand, it is preferable that the notification timing on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, information on the stop operation is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi”, and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. During the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chilli lip”, “reach eye lip” or “replay” based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side but only on the sub-side.

  As described above, since the combination of the symbols “Triple Chile Lip” and “Reach Eye Lip” is related to the provision of a special privilege, the presence or absence of notification seems to affect the player's profit (out) It can also be considered. However, in the pachislot machine 1, in practice, a special privilege is given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the displayed symbol combination does not affect the given privilege. That is, when winning the flag conversion lottery, even if the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In such a case, even if a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and “reach eye lip” can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (out of play), without performing notification on the instruction monitor on the main side, Notification on the display unit 100 is performed only on the sub-side.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is made to aim for a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the role “F_BB1” is carried over, “White 7 Navi” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the role “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. “White 7 Navi” notifies the combination “F_BB1” of the stop operation information for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB1”, and “Blue 7 Navi” displays the combination “F_BB2”. Information on the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB2” is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, any combination of “bonus”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and when the other combination is determined as an internal winning combination together with the bonus combination, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and 78 (D), when performing control on the main side, the main control board 71 is “displaced”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination” with the bonus carry-over. “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” is performed only when either “2” or “F_Special Role 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination can be won.

  The main control board 71 may perform “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” only after notifying (bonus notification) that the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

  As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect performed over several games (so-called continuous effect) is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen is displayed according to the result of this continuous effect. Generally done. If “white 7 navigation” or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, which may impair interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after the bonus notification is made. It should be noted that a method for enabling the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus notification, and after digesting the number of games, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 A method of performing “navigation” can be considered. More specifically, when the number of games required for bonus notification is determined, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, and after the count result reaches a predetermined number When a combination related to the bonus and any one of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” I do.

  As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines that the bonus winning combination is an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, the main control board 71 performs an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed on the display unit 100. Determine and notify the sub-control board 72. The sub-control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, whereby the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

  Of course, it is also possible to make it possible for the main side to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by other methods. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot accept a signal from the sub-control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that can be accepted by the main control board 71. . For example, since the signal associated with the stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In the event of a loss, a bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “bonus related combination”). In the case of a stop operation “other than forward press”), a bonus notification is made. Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed on the main side can be grasped.

[Data table on the secondary control side]
<Property data table>
As shown in FIG. 79, the accessory data table is referred to by the sub CPU 102 in order to control the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 that drive the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 as movable accessories, respectively.

  79. From the left, the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79 includes information on the sequence number, operation content, step number, pulse width, number of pulses, motor control directions of the drive motor F21 and drive motor E25, and step transition (in the figure, “ Step transition ") is associated.

  The motor control direction indicates the control direction of the drive motor F21 (hereinafter also referred to as “motor A”) and the drive motor E25 (hereinafter also referred to as “motor B”). When the motor control direction is “+”, the motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps increases. When the motor control direction is “−”, the motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps decreases. When the motor control direction is “+” or “−”, the motor is driven by the number of pulses by a phase current having a pulse with a period indicated by the pulse width.

  When the motor control directions of the motor A and the motor B are “+”, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 move from the standby position direction toward the exposure position direction, and the motor control direction is “−”. In this case, the lens moves from the exposure position direction to the standby position direction.

  When the motor control direction is “H”, all phases of the corresponding motor are excited, the corresponding motor is stopped, and the stopped state is maintained. That is, when the motor control direction is “H”, the corresponding motor is controlled by the sub CPU 102 such that the motor is maintained in the stopped state over the excitation stop time that is the period indicated by the pulse width.

  When the motor control direction is “0”, the excitation of all phases of the corresponding motor is stopped, the corresponding motor is not driven, and can rotate with respect to the external force over the period indicated by the pulse width.

  Information relating to the transfer of steps includes settings, transfer conditions, and transfer destinations. The setting is “1” if the transition condition is set, and “0” if the transition condition is not set.

  That is, when the setting is “0”, the next step is executed after the corresponding step is executed. When the setting is “1”, if the transition condition is satisfied when the corresponding step is being executed, the transition destination step is executed, and if the transition condition is not satisfied, the next step is executed. .

  The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the front screen mechanism E1 with a step count F based on the movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count F according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor A constituted by the stepping motor and the motor control direction. Specifically, if the motor control direction of the motor A is “+”, every time the number of pulses is updated by 1, the step count F is incremented by 1, and if the motor control direction is “−”, the step count F Is reduced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position to “0”, and sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position to “210”. The position of the front screen mechanism E1 is managed and controlled.

  The front screen mechanism E1 is regulated by a regulating member (not shown) so that the step count F falls within the range of “−2” to “215” with a slight margin in the range of “0” to “210”. ing. The movable reference unit of the front screen mechanism E1 is a unit that can be calculated based on the movable range (for example, 90 °) of the front screen mechanism E1 and the operation angle of the motor A that moves with one pulse.

  The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 with a step count R based on the movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count R according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor B constituted by the stepping motor and the motor control direction.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position to “0”, and sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position to “138”. The position of the front screen mechanism E1 is managed and controlled.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is regulated by a regulating member (not shown) so that the step count F is within a range of “0” to “138”. The movable reference unit of the reel screen mechanism F1 is a unit that can be calculated by the movable range (for example, 148 °) of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the operation angle of the motor B that moves with one pulse.

  In the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, the basic operation 1 with a sequence number of 1 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position (step count F = 210).

  Specifically, in step 1, the front screen mechanism E1 is de-energized for 100 ms. In step 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is driven toward the front exposure position by 250 pulses in a 3 ms cycle. Move on to step 3.

  However, if the step count F representing the number of steps of the motor A in the sub CPU 102 is 210 or more, the basic operation 1 shifts to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed. In step 3, the front screen mechanism E1 is de-energized for 100 ms.

  Similarly, in the basic operation 2 with the sequence number 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position (step count F = 0). In the basic operation 3 with the sequence number 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel exposure position (step count R = 138).

  Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position for 8 pulses in a cycle of 4 ms. Move on to step 3.

  However, if the step count R representing the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 is 128 or more, the basic operation 3 proceeds to step 4 even if step 2 is being executed.

  In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position by 180 pulses at a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 3 moves to step 4. However, if the step count R is 128 or more, the basic operation 3 moves to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

  In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position by 10 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 3 shifts to step 5. In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms.

  The basic operation 4 with a sequence number of 4 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position (step count R = 0). Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 8 pulses in a cycle of 4 ms. Move on to step 3.

  However, if the step count R indicating the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 is 10 or less, the basic operation 4 proceeds to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed.

  In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position by 160 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 3. However, if the step count R is 10 or more, the basic operation 4 proceeds to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

  In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 100 pulses at a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. However, if the reel standby position sensor F19 detects the reel screen mechanism F1, the basic operation 4 proceeds to step 5 even if step 4 is being executed. Hereinafter, the reel standby position sensor F19 is also simply referred to as “sensor C”. Further, “OFF → ON” represents that the corresponding sensor has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state.

  In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F <b> 1 is driven toward the reel standby position by two pulses at a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. In step 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms.

  The basic operation 5 with a sequence number of 5 is a sequence for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position as in the basic operation 1. The difference from the basic operation 1 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F and the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from the non-detection state (OFF state) to the detection state (ON state), and the step 3 has a 3 ms cycle. This is a point driven toward the front exposure position for 19 pulses. Hereinafter, the front exposure position sensor E15b is also simply referred to as “sensor B”.

  The basic operation 5 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

  The basic operation 6 with a sequence number of 6 is a sequence for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position as in the basic operation 2. The difference from the basic operation 2 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F and the front standby position sensor E15a changes from the non-detection state (OFF state) to the detection state (ON state), and the step 3 has a period of 3 ms. In this point, it is driven toward the front standby position for 20 pulses. Hereinafter, the front standby position sensor E15a is also simply referred to as “sensor A”.

  The basic operation 6 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

  The basic operation 7 with the sequence number 7 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position as in the basic operation 4. The difference from the basic operation 4 is that there is no step transition condition for the step transition condition.

  The basic operation 7 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) for confirming the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 when the power is turned on.

  The rendering operation 1 with the sequence number 8 vibrates the front screen mechanism E1 to a position corresponding to the step count F = 18. The rendering operation 2 with the sequence number 9 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to a position corresponding to the step count F = 50.

  In step 3 of the production operation 2, the excitation of the front screen mechanism E1 is stopped at a position corresponding to the step count F = 50 for 65000 ms. However, during the actual operation, the production operation 2 is performed by the player's operation or the like. It is assumed that the program is interrupted by other effects that are executed.

  For this reason, in step 4 and subsequent steps, when step 3 of the rendering operation 2 is not interrupted, the front screen mechanism E1 is installed on the front screen mechanism E1 in order to prevent aged deterioration due to the motor A being continuously excited. It is set to return to the standby position, that is, the stationary position.

  The rendering operation 3 with the sequence number 10 is stopped by moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a position corresponding to the step count R = 72. The rendering operation 4 with the sequence number 11 is stopped by moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a position corresponding to the step count R = 92.

  The rendering operation 5 with the sequence number 12 is stopped by moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a position corresponding to the step count R = 100. The effect of dropping the reel screen mechanism F1 by the effect operations 3, 4, and 5 is realized by continuously executing the effect operations 3, 4 or the effect operations 3, 5.

  In Step 5 of the rendering operation 3, Step 3 of the rendering operation 4 and Step 4 of the rendering operation 5, the excitation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped at a non-stationary position where the reel screen mechanism F1 is half-exposed. Similar to step 3, the subsequent steps are set to prevent the motor B from advancing over time.

  The rendering operation 6 with the sequence number 13 is stopped by moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a position corresponding to the step count R = 106. In the effect operation 6, the steps before step 7 are set so that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at a position corresponding to the step count R = 106 regardless of the position.

  Also in step 7 of the production operation 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped to be excited for 65000 ms at the non-stationary position. It is set to prevent it from progressing.

  In the rendering operation 7 with the sequence number 14, after the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 103, it is vibrated once to a position corresponding to the step count R = 93, and the step count R Return to the position corresponding to = 103.

  In the production operation 8 with the sequence number 15, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 103 at a different speed from the production operation 7, and then the step count R at a different speed from the production operation 7. Vibrate once to a position corresponding to = 93, and return to a position corresponding to step count R = 103.

  In Step 9 of the production operation 7 and Step 7 of the production operation 8, the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped by 65000 ms excitation at the non-stationary position. The motor B is set to prevent aged deterioration of the motor B. In the rendering operation 9 with a sequence number of 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position at a low speed.

  In the accessory data table, the sequence of the basic operation 1 of sequence number 1 to the basic operation 7 of sequence number 7 is performed when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on and executed, and the gaming state transitions. This sequence is used when the screen to be displayed is changed during the transition from the normal game to the bonus game, the CT, or the ART. The production operation 1 from the sequence number 8 to the production operation 9 from the sequence number 16 Is a sequence selected based on the production content and production data determined in the production content determination process (see FIG. 107).

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 constitutes drive control means for controlling the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on each step of the operation represented by the accessory data table. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 has a stationary position where the motor A can be stopped without exciting the motor A and an excitation stop position where the motor A can be stopped by exciting the motor A. In the front screen mechanism E1, the stationary position corresponds to the front exposure position and the front standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range excluding the front exposure position and the front standby position.

  Further, the reel screen mechanism F1 has a stationary position where the motor B can be stopped without exciting the motor B, and an excitation stop position where the motor B can be stopped by exciting the motor B. In the reel screen mechanism F1, the stationary position corresponds to the reel exposure position and the reel standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range excluding the reel exposure position and the reel standby position.

[Description of main control board operation]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU>
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input of the medal sensor 46 and the start switch 64 is checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 42 and 43) corresponding to the current gaming state, and lottery is determined from among a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Subsequent to the processing of S6 or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” have not been determined as internal winning combinations (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to state by state described later in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs main-side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets navigation data (0 or a value of 1 to 11) according to the current gaming state and internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. Note that the start command data includes a subflag (see FIG. 53) and various types of information necessary for effects such as a gaming state.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 ms). It is controlled so that a constant speed is maintained.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process described later with reference to FIG. 92 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed. The

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line, the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and re-game operation is determined. Give a profit. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning action command and transmits it to the sub control board 72. The winning action command data includes various types of information such as combinations of symbols displayed along the active line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 93 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95 (S16).
In this process, the main CPU 93 performs control to shift the RT gaming state based on the displayed symbol combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ / ART termination process described later with reference to FIG. 96 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs CZ pull-back lottery. When the CZ / ART termination process is performed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the state-specific control process will be described. In the state-specific control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). When it is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32 or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in effect (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If it is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal start process described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S34), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is during CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a start process during CZ, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S36), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is normal ART (S37). If it is during normal ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs processing during start during normal ART, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S38), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CT (S39). If the CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a start process during CT, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 (S40), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a BB start process described later with reference to FIG. 90 (S42), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 93 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 93 performs processing corresponding to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a CT start time (S50). When it is time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 93, after referring to the CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 68), lots and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. (S51).

  Subsequent to the processing of S51 or when it is not the time of CT start in S50 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a flag conversion lottery table corresponding to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the non-ART RT4 gaming state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 77) is set, and if the current state is the normal ART RT4 gaming state The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 62) is set. If the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 69) is set.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and then determines whether or not it is won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the winning combination “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is handled as the “Triple Chilli Lip”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-ART (S56). In other words, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been made accidentally in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general gaming state (non-ART) notification is not performed. judge. If the current gaming state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), and then sets the next game to be ready for ART (S58), flag The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in the non-ART state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the flag conversion process.

  If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 93 performs a flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the winning combination “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is handled as the winning “Replay”.

<Normal start processing>
Next, normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 93 performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and internal winning combination with reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56A (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won in the CZ game counter. (S64). Note that the CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ. When the player wins CZ1, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half) If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S64 or when the CZ lottery is not won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table in FIG. Based on the winning combination, the CZ lottery state transition lottery is performed (S65), the CZ lottery state is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal start time process is terminated.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the start time process during CZ will be described. In the start process during CZ, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86 (S72), and ends the process during start during CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is during CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86 (S74), and ends the process during start during CZ. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in ranks (modes or points) with different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one process in CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a process in CZ3 to be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S75), and ends the process at the start in CZ.

<Medium treatment in CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the middle process of CZ1 (CZ2), first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If it is the first half (YES), the main CPU 93 moves the process to S82, and if it is not the first half (is the second half) (NO), the main CPU 93 moves the process to S91 in FIG.

  In the case of the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ1 mode-up lottery table (FIG. 57) and performs mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, if it is the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ2 point lottery table (FIG. 58) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the game is won (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this processing, the main CPU 93 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63A). When freeze occurs, “ART level 2” is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S86), and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, when freezing is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). When the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the process during CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 86, when it is the second half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game of the second half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 59A and 59B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

  When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63A). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94 or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 93 sets “4” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning the ART lottery, and “3” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning the ART lottery. "Is set.

  Following the processing of S95, or when it is not one game of the latter half in S91 (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ ART lottery table (FIG. 59C) and plays an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63A). And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the processing of S98 or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the CZ game number counter (second half) by 1 (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends processing in CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

<Processing during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the process in CZ3 will be described. In the process during CZ3, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIG. 60 (D)), performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and wins this ART lottery. It is determined whether or not (S122).

  When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). When the freezing is won (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a freezing process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

  Following the processing of S125 or when freezing has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to determine the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63A). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 processing.

  On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ3 in-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the ART set number, and also determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63A). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 processing.

<Normal start processing during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the processing at the start during normal ART will be described. In the normal ART start process, first, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the ART continuing game number counter (S141). The ART continued game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuing game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART can continue is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65), performs CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). When the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets the CT game number counter to 8 (S144), and then the type of the type won for the next game. CT is set (S145).

  Subsequent to the processing of S145 or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63B), and continues the ART continued game number counter. Based on this value, the ART level is determined and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal ART medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 64), and lots and sets the destination CT lottery state based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal ART extra lottery table (FIG. 66), performs an extra lottery based on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. Determination is made (S149). If the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the processing of S150, or when the extra lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to reach the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal start processing during ART.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 93 decrements the ART set number by 1 (S152), and then continues the ART end time. It is set (S153) and the processing at the start during normal ART is terminated.

<Processing during CT start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the start processing during CT will be described. In the start processing during CT, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the extra lottery table during CT (FIG. 70) and performs an extra lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). Note that, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional amount per time increases as the number of times of winning the “three-line chili lip” increases during the same CT.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a combination “triple chip” (that is, whether or not it has been converted to a “triple chip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 82) (S164). ). If the internal winning combination is a “triple chililip” (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and the CT start process is terminated. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is not the “three-time chililip” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start process during CT.

  If the winning lottery is not won in S162 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the set number adding lottery table during CT (FIG. 71) and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won for this number of CT sets (S167). If it is determined that the number of CT sets is determined to be added (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

  On the other hand, if the number of CT sets has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and then, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter Whether or not becomes 0 is determined (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start process during CT.

  When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the processing at the start during CT. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends CT, sets normal ART to the next game (S174), and ends the start-time processing during CT.

<Process during start during BB>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the processing at the start during BB will be described. In the start process during BB, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus ART game number addition lottery table (FIG. 74) and performs the lottery drawing of the ART game number based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the extra lottery is won (S182). If the winning lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing at the start during BB.

  On the other hand, if the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 then adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 93 ends the processing at the start during BB. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the processing at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to a rotating drum stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires a rotating drum stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the spinning cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each piece of information based on the spinning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires various types of information associated with the number for stopping the spinning, such as determination data for each pressing order.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194) and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operating counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control process>
Next, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 17S. When the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 93 selects a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 5) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. The order of the stop operation (push order) is managed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding piece number determination process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the turning stop initial setting table. It is processing.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S208). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 93 executes symbol code storage processing (S210). In the symbol code storing process, a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reel is updated when the control stop process is in a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 17S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operating counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this drawing priority order storing process, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check processing>
Next, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in a bonus state (S221). When the bonus state is in effect (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13 in FIG. 80) from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. In step S222, the payout number of medals paid out in step S222 is subtracted.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 continues to A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 gaming state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus end CT lottery table (FIG. 75) to perform CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225) and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 93 then adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets and 1 is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

  Subsequent to the processing of S227 or when the CT lottery is not won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs BB check processing. finish.

  On the other hand, if neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table (FIG. 55 (B)), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  If the bonus state is not set in S221 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols BB (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). When the BB symbol combination is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93, after referring to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 73), draws and sets a bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs a bonus start process (S235), and ends the BB check process. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 93 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Next, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the RT check process, while when not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to be in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  If it is in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S243). When “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while when “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). If the game is in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a symbol combination of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S246). When “bell spilling” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and also turns off the RT1 gaming state flag to shift from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if “bell spill” is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, whereas if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT1 gaming state flag and RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state (S249), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). If it is in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S251). When “RT3 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while when “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, the RT3 gaming state flag is set on and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). If it is in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (S262). When “bell spill” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and also turns the RT3 gaming state flag off, and from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither “Bell Spilled Eye” nor “RT2 Transition Lip” is displayed in S262, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination “RT4 Transition Lip” is displayed. (S264). When “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while when “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART preparation is set (S266). When the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the RT check process, while when the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of CT sets. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

  When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the normal ART to the next game, sets a predetermined value to the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 93 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of “bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip”. It is determined whether or not (S270). When neither “Bell spilling eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed. If displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and also turns the RT4 gaming state flag off to shift from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<CZ / ART end processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the CZ / ART termination process will be described. In the CZ / ART end process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a CZ failure time or ART end time (S281). If it is neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the CZ / ART termination processing, while if CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 56B), performs CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery is won (S283).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won in the CZ game number counter. In step S285, the CZ / ART termination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the normal gaming state in the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 55 (B)), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end process.

[Description of sub-control board operation]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 110.

<Property control task>
FIG. 97 shows the processing flow of the accessory control task executed by the sub CPU 102.

  At the time of activation, the sub CPU 102 clears the step count F and the step count R to 0, and initializes the accessory stop flag indicating whether or not the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is prohibited to OFF. Processing is executed (S301).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an accessory activation test accessory data registration process (S302). In the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 moves the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position, and displays the detection results of the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b. Based on this, the step count F is matched with the position of the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position, and performs steps based on the detection result of the reel standby position sensor F19. The count R is aligned with the position of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In addition, in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 receives the accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 1 of sequence number 1 for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position as the initial position. Store in the sub-RAM 103.

  Further, in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 receives the accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 4 of sequence number 4 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position as the initial position. Store in the sub-RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and the accessory stop flag is OFF (S303). When the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and it is determined that the accessory stop flag is OFF (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the accessory operation sequence registration process described with reference to FIG. (S304).

  When it is determined that the accessory data is not stored in the sub RAM 103 or the accessory stop flag is not OFF (NO), or after executing the processing of step S304, the sub CPU 102 refers to FIG. The described accessory control process is executed (S305). Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for 1 ms (S306), and returns the accessory control task to step S303.

  Specifically, the process of waiting for 1 ms is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time from 1 ms to steps S303 to S305 (for example, if the processing time of S303 to S305 is 0.3 ms, the waiting time for 1 ms is 0. 7 ms) Wait. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the accessory control task at a cycle of 1 ms.

<Accessory action sequence registration process>
FIG. 98 shows the flow of the accessory operation sequence registration process executed in the accessory control task whose flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a movable screen position determination process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S310). Next, the sub CPU 102 produces effect data (step number, pulse width, number of pulses) included in the sequence data associated with the accessory data stored in the sub RAM 103 by the accessory data table shown in FIG. , Information on the motor control direction of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 and step transition) is stored as operation data in the sequence data storage area assigned to the sub RAM 103 (S311).

  Here, when the operation data of the sequence data is already stored in the sequence data storage area when the operation data of other sequence data is already stored in the sequence data storage area, the sub CPU 102 stores the sequence data to be registered in the sequence data storage area. The sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area by adjusting the step number of the operation data and the step number of the operation data of the registered sequence data.

  For example, when the operation represented by the newly registered sequence data is executed after the operation represented by the registered sequence data, the operation is newly performed so as to follow the step number of the last operation data of the registered sequence data. The sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area by adjusting the step number of each operation data of the sequence data to be registered.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102 executes the operation represented by the newly registered sequence data before the operation represented by the registered sequence data, the sub CPU 102 follows the step number of the last operation data of the newly registered sequence data. In this way, the effect data is registered in the sequence data storage area by adjusting the step number of each operation data of the registered sequence data.

  Further, the sub CPU waits for the registered sequence data to be one of the rendering operations, the newly registered sequence data to be another rendering operation, or the reel screen mechanism F1 or the front screen mechanism E1. When the accessory data moving to the position is registered, the registered sequence data is canceled, and the effect data of the newly registered sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area from step 1, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor drivers for the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S312), The accessory operation sequence registration process is terminated. The sub CPU 102 controls the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on operation data registered in the motor driver by another task (not shown) different from the accessory control task.

  Specifically, based on the operation data registered in the motor driver, for example, if the motor control direction of the drive motor F21 is “+”, the pulse width is 4 ms, and the number of pulses is 10, A of the drive motor F21 (And A-phase A bar) is excited for 2 ms, B (and B-phase is opposite) B is excited for 2 ms, and the number of pulses is decremented by one. And the excitation of A and B phases is repeated until the number of pulses becomes zero. If the motor control direction is the “−” direction, the A and B phases are excited in the reverse excitation order, and if the motor control direction is “H”, the pulse width time A (and the reverse phase) Both A bar) and B (and reversed B bar) phases are excited.

<Property control process>
FIG. 99 shows the flow of the accessory action sequence registration process executed in the accessory control task whose process flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation states of the drive motor F21 (motor A) and the drive motor E25 (motor B), that is, the motor operation state from the motor driver (S320).

  The motor operation status includes whether or not the motor is operating, the type of motor being operated (motor A or motor B), the pulse count (absolute value) in the operation data, the direction of the motor being operated (“+”, “ − ”,“ H ”), pulse time (ms), and pulse time count (ms), and when registered in the motor driver of the drive motor F21 and drive motor E25, motor excitation in the motor type and motor direction Direction is set to pulse count, pulse number to pulse time, pulse width to pulse time, and 0 to pulse time count.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count update process for updating the step count F and the step count R (S321). In the step count update process, the sub CPU 102 updates based on the pulse count of the motor operation state acquired in step S320.

  For example, when the drive motor F21 (motor A) is operating and the pulse count is updated from “6” to “5”, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count to F when the motor direction is “+”. 1 is added, and when the motor direction is “−”, 1 is subtracted from the step count F.

  Specifically, when the motor direction is “−”, the pulse time is 10 ms, and the pulse count is 20, the motor A driver is excited by exciting the B phase (and the opposite-phase B bar) of the motor A for 10 ms. When the phase is excited for 10 ms, the pulse count is updated from “20” to “19”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 has ended, that is, whether or not the motor operation state acquired in step S321 indicates the operation end (S322).

  If it is determined that the motor operation state represents the end of operation (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area to the next step (S323). For example, the sub CPU 102 updates the already-executed operation data to the position (next step) of the next operation data in the data pointer of the sequence data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is operation data in the sequence data storage area (indicated by the data pointer) (S324). The sub CPU 102 registers an end block (for example, “0xFFFFH”) after the last operation data when updating the sequence data storage area. Therefore, if the end block is registered in the sequence data storage area, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no operation data in the sequence data storage area.

  If it is determined that there is no operation data in the sequence data storage area (it is an end block) (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory operation sequence registration process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is operation data in the sequence data storage area (not an end block) (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area. The obtained operation data is registered in the motor driver (S325).

  In step S322, when it is determined that the motor operation state does not indicate the end of operation (YES), or after executing the process of step S325, the sub CPU 102 performs sensors A to C (that is, the front standby position sensor E15a, The states of the front exposure position sensor E15b and the reel standby position sensor F19) are acquired (S326).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data transfer condition from the sequence data storage area (S327). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the acquired transition condition is set (S328). Here, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the information setting (see FIG. 79) relating to the transition of the operation data step is set to “1”.

  If it is determined that the transition condition is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a step transition determination process for determining whether or not the transition condition is satisfied (S329). For example, referring to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the sub CPU 102 is performing the rendering operation 3 with the sequence number 10, the step count R is 72 or more in step 3. If the step condition R is not 72 or more, it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the transition condition is satisfied as a result of the step transition determination process (S330). If it is determined that the transfer condition is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data storage area so as to shift to the step indicated by the transfer destination (S331).

  For example, with reference to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the transition condition is satisfied when performing the rendering operation 3 with the sequence number of 10, The sequence data storage area is updated so that the operation data in step 5 comes to the beginning of the sequence data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor drivers for the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S332).

  If it is determined in step S328 that the transition condition is not set (NO), if it is determined in step S330 that the transition condition is not satisfied (NO), or after executing the process of step S332, The CPU 102 determines whether any of the detection states of the sensors A to C has changed (S333).

  When it is determined that there is no change in any of the detection states of the sensors A to C, the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory operation sequence registration process. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the detection states of the sensors A to C has changed, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count correction process for correcting the step count F or the step count R (S334), The operation sequence registration process ends.

  In the step count correction process, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F to “19” when the item of the motor A is “+” and the sensor A changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception). to correct. Further, the sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “23” when the item of the motor A is “−” and the sensor A changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding).

  The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “192” when the item of the motor A is “+” and the sensor B changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding). Further, the sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “188” when the item of the motor A is “−” and the sensor B changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception).

  The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to “3” when the item of the motor B is “+” and the sensor C changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception). . The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to “2” when the item of the motor B is “−” and the sensor C changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light-shielding).

<Moving screen position determination process>
FIG. 100 shows the flow of the movable screen position determination process executed in the accessory action sequence registration process whose flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command is received (S350). If it is determined that the start command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

  If it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 specifies the motor to be controlled from the motor A and the motor B from the operation data stored in the sequence data storage area (S351). Here, the sub CPU 102 specifies a motor in which the motor control direction of the operation data is “+”, “−”, or “H”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a movable screen interference determination process for determining whether or not both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are exposed (S352).

  In the movable screen interference determination process, the sub CPU 102 detects the current position of the movable screen driven by a motor different from the motor to be controlled based on the detection states of the sensors A to C, the step count F, and the step count R. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes an accessory position determination unit.

  For example, with reference to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the rendering operation 3 of sequence number 10 is executed, the motor B that drives the reel screen mechanism F1 is the motor to be controlled, so the front screen The mechanism E1 needs to be in the front standby position.

  At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position when the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) or when the step count F is not 21 or less. It is determined that the position of the mechanism E1 is F-screen interference that is an error. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes an accessory position error detection unit.

  Similarly, when the basic operation 5 with the sequence number 5 is executed, the motor A that drives the front screen mechanism E1 becomes the motor to be controlled, so the reel screen mechanism F1 needs to be at the reel standby position.

  At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light reception), or when the step count R is not 3 or less, and the reel screen It is determined that the position of the mechanism F1 is R screen interference that is an error.

  After executing the process of step S352, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the F screen interference occurs (S353). If it is determined that the F screen interference occurs (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position, that is, the basic operation 2 of sequence number 2 in the accessory data table shown in FIG. The operation data for this is registered at the head of the sequence storage area (S354), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S355).

  In addition, in order to move the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position, the basic operation 2 with the sequence number 2 in the accessory data table is used, but the basic operation 6 with the sequence number 6 is used instead of the sequence number 2. Also good.

  The accessory error count indicates the number of times errors relating to the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are continuously detected, and is cleared to 0 when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off or by the watchdog timer. Is done.

  If it is determined that there is no F screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is R screen interference (S356). If it is determined that the interference is the R screen interference (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the basic operation 4 of sequence number 4 in the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, that is, the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. The operation data for this is registered at the head of the sequence storage area (S357), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S358).

  In order to move the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position, the basic operation 4 with the sequence number 4 in the accessory data table is used, but the basic operation 6 with the sequence number 6 is used instead of the sequence number 4. Also good.

  If it is determined that there is no R screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the unit game start positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Processing is executed (S359).

  In the game start screen position determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 if the sensor C is in the non-detection state when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position due to the effect. To do.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 if the sensor A is in the non-detection state or the sensor B is in the detection state when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposure position due to the effect. .

  Further, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sensor A is in the non-detection state or the sensor B is in the detection state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position. If the sensor C is in the non-detection state, it is determined that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1.

  After executing the game start screen position determination process in step S359, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, that is, whether there is a position abnormality (S360). .

  When determining that there is a position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the accessory error count (S361). When determining that there is no position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 clears the accessory error count to 0 (S362), and ends the movable screen position determination process.

  After executing the process of step S355, S358, or S361, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory error count is 10 or more (S363). When determining that the accessory error count is not 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

  If it is determined that the accessory error count is 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 executes error registration processing (S364). In the error registration process, the sub CPU 102 registers the error type “YAKUMONO STOP” and the occurrence date (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) in the error information history storage area of the SRAM constituting the sub RAM 103 without displaying the error screen. .

  Thereby, the clerk (store clerk) can display the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from the error information history screen that can be displayed on the image display device 201a when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not moving. It is possible to confirm that an error relating to the position of has occurred.

  After executing the process of step S364, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory stop flag to ON and ends the movable screen position determination process.

<Main task>
FIG. 101 shows the flow of main task processing executed by the sub CPU 102. The sub CPU 102 executes VSYNC interrupt initialization processing at the time of activation (S370).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S371). In this embodiment, since the sub CPU 102 displays the video at 30 fps, the VSYNC interrupt is generated at a cycle of 33 ms. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the main task at a cycle of 33 ms.

  When a VSYNC interrupt occurs, the sub CPU 102 executes a chance button process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S372). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a navigation position designation process described with reference to FIG. 104 (S373).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process for the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a (S374). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes error display processing described with reference to FIG. 103 (S375), and returns the main task to step S371. As described above, the sub CPU 102 that executes the main task constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a.

<Chance button processing>
FIG. 102 shows the flow of chance button processing executed in the main task whose flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the chance button LED 34 is lit (S380). When it is determined that the chance button LED 34 is lit (YES), the sub CPU 102 detects that the chance button 33 is pressed by the chance switch 35, inserts a medal, or presses the MAX bet button 11. It is determined whether or not a medal insertion command indicating that there has been received from the main control circuit 91 (S381).

  If it is determined that pressing of the chance button has not been detected by the chance switch 35 and no medal insertion command has been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button process.

  If it is determined that the chance button has been pressed by the chance switch 35 or that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to turn off the chance button LED 34 ( S382).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect switching process (S383), and ends the chance button process. In the effect switching process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect according to conditions such as the sub flag and the gaming state.

  For example, the sub CPU 102 displays the number of added games on the display unit 100 or the like when an addition is determined during ART, and the chance button 33 is pressed when a bonus is won during normal or ART. Later, the effect is switched to the effect between bonus flags.

  If it is determined in step S380 that the chance button LED 34 is not lit (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a chance button effect triggered by pressing of the chance button 33 has been selected (S384).

  The chance button effect is selected when a chance button lighting lottery is won in the effect lottery process executed by the sub CPU 102 when a start command is received or a winning command is received.

  If it is determined in step S384 that the chance button effect has not been selected (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance button effect is selected (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to turn on the chance button LED 34 (S385).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers a chance button effect (S386), and ends the chance button process. For example, in the chance button effect, the sub CPU 102 displays a video imitating the shape of the chance button 33 in a substantially central area of the display area of the display unit 100.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display an effect video display unit that displays an image corresponding to the effect on the display unit 100 and an effect that is triggered by the operation of the effect operation unit such as the chance button 33. The effect operation display means to display is comprised.

<Error display processing>
FIG. 103 shows the flow of error display processing executed in the main task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error is being displayed (S400). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether an error video indicating an error relating to the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  If it is determined that no error is being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an error has occurred (S401). Specifically, whether the sub CPU 102 has received an error command indicating an error detected by the main control board 71 from the main control board 71 (see FIG. 107), or has detected an error by the sub control board 72. Judging.

  The error command is a process executed by the main CPU 93. For example, when a medal clogging error detected by the medal sensor 46, a medal retrograde error, a payout medal empty detected by the hopper device 43, or a hopper jam occurs. The command to be sent.

  If it is determined that an error has occurred (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the states of the sensors A to C (S402). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and the sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (S403).

  When it is determined that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the detection state (light-shielding) (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and It is determined whether or not the sensor B is in a non-detection state (light reception) (S404).

  If it is determined in step S403 that sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (YES), or in step S404, sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception). ) And the sensor B determines that it is in the non-detection state (light reception), since the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, the sub CPU 102 An error image for the F screen, which is an error image for the front screen mechanism E1 as shown in FIG. 112, is output from the ROM cartridge substrate 76 to the projector mechanism B2 (S405), and the error display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S404 that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light reception). It is determined whether or not (S406).

  If it is determined that the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light reception) (YES), the video output from the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1, and therefore the sub CPU 102 determines that the ROM cartridge substrate The R screen error video, which is the error video for the reel screen mechanism F1 as shown in FIG. 113, is output from the projector mechanism B2 to the projector mechanism B2 (S407), and the error display processing is terminated.

  When it is determined that the sensor C is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), since the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, the sub CPU 102 determines the ROM cartridge substrate 76. 114, the W screen error image, which is an error image for the fixed screen mechanism D as shown in FIG. 114, is output to the projector mechanism B2 (S408), and the error display process is terminated. That is, the ROM cartridge substrate 76 constitutes error video storage means for storing the error video shown in FIGS.

  If it is determined in step S400 that an error is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the error has been canceled or whether an error display termination condition has been satisfied (S409).

  The sub CPU 102 receives an error command indicating the cancellation of the error detected by the main control board 71 from the main control board 71, the case where the error detected by the sub control board 72 is resolved, or an operation for eliminating the error. If the door key reset operation is performed after the determination, it is determined that the error has been released.

  The sub CPU 102 determines that the error display end condition is satisfied when the time measured by the timer has passed the error display time in response to the error of the sub control board 72 for which the display time is set.

  If it is determined that the error has not been canceled and the error display end condition is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the error display process. If it is determined that the error has been canceled or the error display end condition is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 erases the error video (S410) and ends the error display processing. That is, in step S410, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display the video before the error has occurred.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 that executes the error display process specifies the screen mechanism on which the video output by the display unit 100 is displayed from among the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. And an error display means for displaying an error video representing the detected error on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 when the error is detected. To do.

  In the error display process, when an error video representing an error relating to the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, the sub CPU 102 displays the fixed screen mechanism D, An error image as shown in FIG. 115 showing the same content as the error video is displayed on the image display device 201a as a sub-display device that has a narrower display area than the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 and is not movable. It may be.

<Navi position specification processing>
FIG. 104 shows the flow of the navigation position designation process executed in the main task whose flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation represented by the operation sequence notification image indicating the operation sequence of the stop operation is being displayed, depending on whether or not the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the start command parameter is other than 0. Judgment is made (S430). When it is determined that the navigation is not being displayed (when the navigation data is 0) (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation process.

  When the navigation data is other than 0 (when the navigation data is any one of 1 to 11) (YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the W screen display in which the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S431).

  If it is determined that the W screen is not being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation process. If it is determined that the W screen is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 causes the reel screen mechanism F1 corresponding to the second display device to fall (“effect operation 3” or “effect operation” in the accessory data table). It is determined whether or not the R screen on which “4”) is being executed is falling (S432).

  If it is determined that the R screen is not falling (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs first navigation position display instruction setting (S433), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the first navigation position display instruction setting, as shown in FIG. 116, the sub CPU 102 selects the first display area included in the front of the fixed screen mechanism D corresponding to the first display device (the reflection surface of the front reflection portion D1). The navigation position.

  If it is determined that the R screen is falling (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs second navigation position display instruction setting (S434), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the second navigation position display instruction setting, as shown in FIG. 117, the sub CPU 102 sets the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D (the reflection surface of the lower surface reflection portion D4) as the navigation position.

  Note that the navigation displayed at the designated navigation position is the first display area or the second display according to the sub-side navigation data set by the sub-side navigation control process (see FIG. 109) described later. Displayed in the area.

<LED control task>
FIG. 105 shows the flow of the LED control task process executed by the sub CPU 102.

  The sub CPU 102 executes an LED control initialization process for initializing the lighting state of each LED of the LED group 75 at the time of activation (S450). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is LED data registered in the sub RAM 103 (S451).

  If it is determined that there is LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes LED data registration processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S452). When it is determined that there is no LED data (NO), or after executing the process of S452, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control process (S453).

  In the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 performs output control for outputting the LED data registered in the LED data registration process to the LED driver. For example, the sub CPU 102 performs output control to output LED data processed by flushing or color change pattern switching to the LED driver with the effect of the reel backlight.

  After executing the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control update process (S454). In the LED control update process, the sub CPU 102 executes an update process such as switching of RGB and a soft timer for managing the lighting / extinguishing time of each LED when dynamically lighting the LED. After executing the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 waits for 4 ms (S455), and returns the LED control task to step S451.

  Specifically, the process of waiting for 4 ms is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time from 1 ms to steps S451 to S452 (for example, if the processing time of S451 to S454 is 1.2 ms, the waiting time of 4 ms is 2. 8 ms) Wait. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the LED control task at a cycle of 4 ms.

<LED data registration process>
FIG. 106 shows the flow of LED data registration processing executed in the LED control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires LED data as light source data from the sub RAM 103 (S460). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is back lamp effect data for executing the back lamp effect in the LED data (S461). The back lamp effect is executed by the reel back lamps for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R included in the LED group 75.

  If it is determined that there is back lamp effect data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires back lamp sequence data corresponding to the back lamp effect data from the LED data of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and the back RAM assigned to the sub RAM 103 is obtained. It is registered in the lamp sequence storage area (S462).

  The back lamp sequence data includes a plurality of light emission patterns (a combination of lighting / extinguishing times), light emission colors, and luminances corresponding to the reel back lamps of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Are stored in units of one full color LED.

  When it is determined that there is no backlamp effect data (NO), or after executing the process of step S462, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is effect LED data in the LED data (S463).

  If it is determined that there is effect LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the effect LED sequence data constituting the effect LED data corresponding to the LED data from the ROM cartridge substrate 76, and the effect assigned to the sub RAM 103. Registration in the LED sequence data storage area (S464).

  When it is determined that there is no effect LED data (NO), or after executing the process of step S464, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is state LED data in the LED data (S465). The state LED data represents the lighting state of the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b representing the gaming state.

  If it is determined that there is status LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires status LED data corresponding to the LED data from the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and registers it in the status LED storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 ( S466).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is side lamp extinction data in the LED data (S467). If it is determined that there is side lamp extinction data (YES), low luminance data is registered in the side lamp data in the state LED storage area (S468). That is, if there is data for turning off the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b, the sub CPU 102 converts the data to turn on the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b with low luminance.

  If it is determined in step S465 that there is no status LED data (NO), if it is determined in step S467 that there is no side lamp extinguishing data (NO), or after executing the processing of step S468, the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not there is a request for lighting an operation button LED provided on the operation button (S469).

  The operation button LED includes an LED provided on the MAX bet button 11 and the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R of the LED group 75 and a chance button LED 34, respectively.

  If it is determined that there is a lighting request (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation button LED lighting data requested to be lit from the LED data and registers it in the operation button LED storage area assigned to the sub RAM 103 ( S470), the LED data registration process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S469 that there is no lighting request (NO), or after executing the process of step S470, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a request for turning off the operation button LED (S471).

  If it is determined that there is no turn-off request (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the LED data registration process. If it is determined that there is a turn-off request (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation button LED turn-off data requested to be turned off (any one LED arranged in the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, or 3 All the LEDs) are acquired and registered in the operation button LED storage area assigned to the sub RAM 103 (S472), and the LED data registration process is terminated. As described above, the sub CPU 102 that executes the LED data registration processing constitutes a light source control unit that controls the lighting state of the light sources such as the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 107 shows a flow of effect content determination processing executed in the main board communication task. First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S480).

  The medal insertion command is detected when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 22 is detected in the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93, or when the operated MAX bet button 11 is operated. This command is transmitted when it is valid (the number of credits is 3 or more).

  If it is determined that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process for determining the effect content according to the parameters included in the medal insertion command (S481). The decision process is terminated.

  If it is determined that a medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S482), and if it has determined that a start command has been received (YES). The sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process described with reference to FIG. 108 (S483), and ends the effect content determination process.

  If it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command indicating that rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started has been received (S484). ).

  If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel rotation start command (S485). Then, the effect content determination process ends. The reel rotation start command is a command transmitted in the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93.

  If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S486). If it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel stop command (S487). The decision process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S488). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning action command receiving process for determining the contents of the effect according to the parameters included in the winning action command (S489). The decision process is terminated.

  If it is determined that a winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an error command has been received (S490). If it is determined that an error command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an error command reception process for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the error command (S491), and performs the effect content determination process. finish.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 108 shows the flow of the start command reception process executed in the effect content determination process whose flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect lottery process for determining an effect based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number for lottery (S500). In the effect lottery process, the accessory data used in the above-mentioned accessory control task (see FIG. 97), the chance button effect and drawing process (in the chance button process (FIG. 102) executed in the main task (see FIG. 101)) Various data related to video used in (not shown) (moving image, still picture, type of screen used, etc.), LED data used in LED control task (see FIG. 105), sound control task (not shown) The sound data used in is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sub-side navigation control process described with reference to FIG. 109 (S501). In addition, the lottery value used in the effect lottery process stores a plurality of lottery values corresponding to the subflag (see FIG. 53) and the gaming state on the ROM cartridge substrate. The random number for lottery is updated by the program every cycle (33 ms) in the main task.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the focus of the projector mechanism B2 needs to be changed based on the effect determined by the effect lottery process (S502). The sub CPU 102 switches the screen mechanism to be displayed on which the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed depending on the gaming state.

  For example, when the gaming state is the general gaming state, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the front screen mechanism E1. Further, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the fixed screen mechanism D when the gaming state is being prepared for ART.

  Further, when the gaming state is the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 selects the screen mechanism to be displayed as the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the effect determined by the effect lottery process. Choose one. Further, when the gaming state is CT, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Since the sub CPU 102 causes the projector mechanism B2 to output an image with the same focus for the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the screen mechanism to be displayed is the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism. When switching between E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, it is determined that the focus needs to be changed.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 does not need to change the focus when the screen mechanism to be displayed does not change or when the screen mechanism to be displayed is switched between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. to decide.

  If it is determined that there is no need to change the focus (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process. If it is determined that the focus needs to be changed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory stop flag is ON (S503). The accessory stop flag is omitted because it has been described in the above-mentioned accessory control task (FIG. 97) and the movable screen position determination process (FIG. 100).

  If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the start command is received. When the accessory stop flag is ON, the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be switched. Therefore, even if an effect requiring a change in focus is determined, the sub CPU 102 Locks the current focus.

  If it is determined that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the start command reception process.

  In the projector mechanism B2, the focus (focal length) for the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1, and the fixed screen mechanism D is set in advance. For this reason, the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus by giving a control command for changing to the focus set for the corresponding screen mechanism. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a focal length control unit that controls the focus with respect to the projector mechanism B2.

  In the present embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 have the same focus, and the fixed screen mechanism D has the focus set to the front reflecting portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the focus of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be set individually, and the sub CPU 102 may be controlled to change the focus of all screen mechanisms.

<Sub navigation control processing>
FIG. 109 shows the flow of the sub-side navigation control process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the parameter of the start command is other than 0 (S510). If it is determined that the navigation data is other than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S511), and ends the sub navigation control process.

  For example, when the navigation data is “4”, the sub CPU 102 sets data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub navigation data. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the navigation data is not 0, that is, the navigation data is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub flag (see FIG. 53) is “2” or “3”. In other words, it is determined whether or not “triple dust A” or “triple dust B” (S512).

  If it is determined that the sub flag is neither “triple dust A” or “triple dust B” (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the sub-side navigation control process. If it is determined that the sub flag is “triple dust A” or “triple dust B” (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub-side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S513), The sub-side navigation control process is terminated.

  In step S513, the sub CPU 102 sets data for informing the pressing order “right, middle, left” as sub navigation data. That is, the sub CPU 102 notifies the content of the stop operation independently on the sub side.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 responds to the navigation data when the added value is obtained (the navigation data is not 0) for the sub flag corresponding to the internal winning combination having a relatively high probability of obtaining the added value. If the sub-side navigation data is set and the added value cannot be obtained (the navigation data is 0), it is possible to recognize that the internal winning combination having a relatively high probability of obtaining the added value is won. Sub-side navigation data for informing the pressing order for displaying difficult combinations along the effective lines is set.

  The navigation notified by the sub-side navigation data is displayed in the first display area (see FIG. 116) or the second display area (see FIG. 117) set by the above-described navigation position designation process (see FIG. 104). Is displayed.

  The sub CPU 102 determines the navigation data (see FIG. 78) by the main CPU 93, and transmits the navigation data to the sub CPU 102 by the start command from the main CPU 93, based on the navigation data by the sub-side navigation control process. The stop notification means for determining the display area for displaying the set sub-side navigation data by the navigation position designation process (FIG. 104) and executing the navigation is configured.

<Game record processing>
FIG. 110 shows a case where a start of recording of game information is requested when a winning action command is received (at the end of a unit game) or during a unit game (when the recording start button 216a shown in FIG. 30 is operated). The flow of the game recording process to be executed is shown.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not recording is in progress (step S520). If it is determined that recording is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the game recording process. If it is determined that recording is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a unit game is being performed (S521).

  If it is determined that a unit game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a one-game recording process that records information in accordance with the progress of the game in the sub RAM 103 (S522), and ends the game recording process. To do.

  If it is determined that the unit game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a one-game end recording process for recording game information related to the unit game in the sub RAM 103 (S523), and ends the game recording process.

  Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes game information recording means. When the start of recording is requested during a unit game, the sub CPU 102 executes a game recording process, records information according to the progress state of the game, and receives a game record when receiving a winning action command for the unit game. Since the process is executed again and the game information related to the unit game is recorded, the recording of the game information can be started during the unit game.

[Switching the display screen of the image display device]
Next, a method for switching the display screen of the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (A) is a transition example of the display screen of the image display device 201a in a situation where game information is not being recorded, and FIG. 111 (B) is an image display device 201a in a situation where game information is being recorded. It is an example of a transition of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 111A, in a situation where game information is not being recorded, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) displays the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a as the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the menu screen. Control is performed so that transition is possible only between various display screens that can be transitioned from 212. Specifically, the sub control board 72 uses the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201b. The display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where game information is not being recorded, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where game information is not being recorded, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the image display device 201a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), in a situation where game information is being recorded, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a as the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be shifted from, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are also controlled to be able to transition. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201b. Thus, in a situation where game information is being recorded, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the image display device 201a.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (B), the order of transition of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is arbitrary. For example, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be directly transitioned from the top screen 211, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be transitioned only from the top screen 211 via the menu screen 212. Good.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not possible to make a direct transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and only through the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, Transition to 215 is possible. More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is made possible by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212.

  Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently from the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, information indicating the result of a game that the player has a strong interest in the game, such as a game history, is related to the game result such as payout arrangement or volume control. Display independently from. The pachislot machine 1 can transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 in a situation where game information is being recorded. As a result, the pachislot machine 1 can make it easier to access information (game history) that the player wants to check in a situation where game information is being recorded.

  On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot be changed to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be changed unless a swipe operation that is not in the menu display is performed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be handled as a hidden command in a situation where game information is being recorded. From the player's perspective, the player's own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows the player to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with less knowledge. As a result, it can be expected to play games actively.

(Display the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachislot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 transition to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, and 215, the display screen transitions from the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

  More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, in the state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the medal insertion slot 22) When the input operation is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. In the state where the replay role that performs the replay operation such as the ART game state is highly likely to be determined as the internal winning combination (or sub flag) (high lip state), the replay operation associated with the replay winning As a result of the automatic insertion of medals, the opportunity to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high lip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when a medal is automatically inserted by the re-game operation, when the start operation is performed instead of the medal insertion, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Transition to 211.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, when the re-game is being performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screen 213, 214, 215 automatically transitions to the top screen 211, and the re-game is activated. If the game is not performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically transitioned to the top screen 211 when the input operation is performed.

(Display from the display screen corresponding to the menu to the top screen (or menu screen))
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the player can change from various display screens (a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. Transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is transitioned from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, , The return button) is operated, the display screen transitions from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is varied depending on the type of display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation, and other players may become uncomfortable due to an erroneous operation. Since there is a possibility that it will occur, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate player registration.

  That is, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is set on the various display screens, the time shorter than the other display screens is set on the volume adjustment screen, The registration screen has a longer time than other display screens.

(Function to select whether or not to operate the menu)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen. Operations can be performed and various information can be confirmed. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be limited in accordance with the settings on the game store side.

  For example, the game store can restrict volume control by the player by restricting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). .

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Then, the modification of the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment is demonstrated.

<Typical CT game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to an advantageous state. However, in a pachislot machine, when advantageous control is performed for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursor game. In this modification, for example, when a CT lottery is won during normal ART, a pachislot machine 1 that does not immediately perform CT but sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 118A, during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65). Winning this CT lottery shifts to a state advantageous to the player called CT (additional chance zone), so various lotteries for CT lottery are performed on the main side (main control board 71) until CT wins. . Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chick Lip”, “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip”. When any of “D” is determined, flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 62).

  On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to this modification, during the CT sign after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the combination “three consecutive chili lip” or the combination “reach eye lip”) A lottery that gives a privilege to a player such as a lottery is not performed. Then, during this CT precursor, flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on this sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, information for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won , Information for displaying a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed on the display unit 100.

  As described above, in the recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform a lottery that affects the player's profit (out of play) on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery A period during which the result does not have any influence on the player's profit (during CT sign) is provided, and flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation where the grant of a privilege that is CT precursor is decided, it is possible to increase the opportunity to display a special symbol combination of “reach eye lip”, and the variation in how to show the symbol combination increases. Therefore, an improvement in playability can be expected.

  FIG. 118B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. The flag conversion lottery table indicating the CT sign defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table for the CT precursor, during the CT precursor, the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are converted to the role “reach eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, when the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the CT precursor, the combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed with high probability. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that a sign is in progress. In addition, although it repeats, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, although the notification for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is performed, no privilege is given.

  Of course, the flag conversion lottery during CT sign may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during the period that does not affect the player's profit as in this modification, the main side Data capacity and processing load can be reduced, which is preferable.

<Another example of the push order for triple dust display>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, when the combination “F_accuracy lip” and “F_1 accuracy lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols of “triple chilli lip” is displayed when the answer is correct in the push order. If the answer is incorrect, the combination of symbols “Replay” is displayed (FIG. 50). Further, it is assumed that the correct answer push order is “forward push” with respect to the roles “F_Challenged Lip” and “F_1 Chilly Lip”.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is increased in the order of pressing when the winning combinations “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are determined as internal winning combinations. , The order of pushing correct answers is made different for each of the roles “F_acceptance lip” and “F_1 credibility”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the role “F_accuracy lip” is “forward press (first stop operation is left reel) 3L) ”, and the incorrect pressing order is“ middle pressing (reel 3C in which the first stop operation is middle) ”and“ reverse pressing (first stop operation is on the right reel 3R) ”. The combination “F_CHILILIPP” is displayed with the symbol combination of “Triple Chililip” when pressed forward, and the symbol combination of “REPLAY” is displayed when pressed with “Middle press”. "Is displayed, the combination of symbols of" Two-time Chile Lip "is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the role “F_1 correct chililip” has the correct push order “reverse push” and the wrong push order “forward push” and “middle push”. And The combination “F_1 Chilli Lip” is displayed with the symbol combination “Triple Chilli Lip” when pressed reversely, and the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed when pressed “Middle Press”. "Is displayed, the combination of symbols of" Two-time Chile Lip "is displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, when any of the combination “F_accuracy lip” and “F_1 accuracy lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the type of the winning combination is determined by “forward pressing”. Depending on the type of the winning combination, “Triple Chile Lip” or “Two Chile Lip” will be displayed. . On the other hand, if any of the combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Challenging Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of “Replay” symbols regardless of the type of winning combination when “Cushing” Is displayed.

  By doing in this way, for example, when the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) for targeting the Chile symbol are possible. Specifically, it is possible to perform both “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pressing forward” and “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pressing backward”. When the role “F_Chili Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “Navi that targets the Chile symbol by pressing forward” is a navigation to display “Triple Chilli Lip”. The “navigation that aims at the Chile symbol” is a navigation for preventing the display of “triple chilli lip” (double chilli lip is displayed). On the other hand, when the role “F_1 certain chili lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pushing forward” is a navigation for preventing “triple chili lip” from being displayed. “Navigation to aim at Chile symbol by pressing” is a navigation for displaying “Triple Chile Lip” (double Chile Lip is displayed).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and the navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

  FIG. 119 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side during normal ART and the navigation on the sub side. During the normal ART, when the winning combination “F_accurate chip” and “F_1 probable chip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-stage flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 62). On the sub side, the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery.

  Specifically, in the case of non-winning at the time of the first stage flag conversion lottery among the two stages of flag conversion lottery, the sub-control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this “replay navigation”, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the middle. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed when the combination is “F_Correct Lip” or “F_1 Chilli Lip”.

  In addition, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won in the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs “chile-repelling navigation”. In this “Chilele Lip Navi”, the sub-control board 72 notifies that the Chile symbol is aimed by reverse pressing when the role “F_Challenging Lip” is an internal winning combination (the sub flag is “Replay”). When “F_1 certain Chile Lip” is an internal winning combination (sub flag is “Replay”), it is notified that the Chile symbol is aimed by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), when the combination “F_accurate lip” is pressed backward and when the combination “F_1 credible lip” is pressed forward, the combination of symbols of “double-chain lip” is displayed. Will be.

  In addition, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage among the two stages of flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs “chili rip matching navigation”. In this “Chilli Lip Uniform Navi”, the sub-control board 72 informs that the Chile symbol is aimed by pushing forward when the role “F_Challenging Lip” is an internal winning combination (the sub flag is “3 Chile A”). However, when the winning combination “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is an internal winning combination (the sub flag is “3 Chile B”), it is notified that the Chile symbol is aimed by reverse pressing. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), the combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” is displayed at any time when the role “F_accurate lip” is pushed forward and when the role “F_1 cred. Will be.

  As described above, since the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect profits (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects profits, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects profits) The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, not only “Chilli lip matching navigation” but also “Chilli lip navigation” can be used to perform navigation that does not affect profits in various ways on the sub-side. Will improve.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prevents a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is stopped while the drive motor E25 is energized from exceeding a specified time (for example, 65000 ms). Therefore, the progress of the aging deterioration of the drive motor E25 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the aged deterioration of the drive motor F21 progresses so that the state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped while the drive motor F21 is excited does not elapse for a predetermined time or longer. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can suppress a failure due to aged deterioration of the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21.

  Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the stationary position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be used as the front standby position or the second stationary position as the first stationary position, depending on the effect being executed. Since the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front exposure position and the effect by the front screen mechanism E1 is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is movable to the stationary position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be used as the reel standby position or the second stationary position as the first stationary position according to the effect being performed. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel exposure position and the effect by the reel screen mechanism F1 is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is output by the projector mechanism B2 among the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 when an error relating to the gaming machine is detected. Since the error video corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the video is displayed is output to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the error video can be improved.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment outputs an error video corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed from the error image stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 to the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, an error video corresponding to the screen on which the video output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed can be output to the projector mechanism B2.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an image display device in which the display performance is stable because the display area is narrower and non-movable than any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. An error relating to the pachislot machine 1 can be confirmed even in 201a.

  Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position and the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position after being moved, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is inconsistent, and these movable objects do not operate normally. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment moves the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position after being moved, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is inconsistent, and these movable objects do not operate normally. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when performing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position, the reel screen 1 Since the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position is performed after moving the mechanism F1 to the reel standby position, the effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, when executing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position. Since the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position is performed after the mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, when executing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel standby position, In order to insert the effect data indicating the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position before the effect data indicating the effect of moving the mechanism E1 from the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. After that, the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position can be executed.

  Further, when executing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position. In order to insert the effect data representing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position before the effect data indicating the effect of moving the mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position. After that, the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position can be executed.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment relates to the position of the screen mechanism in order to prohibit the driving of the corresponding screen mechanism when an error relating to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is detected. It is possible to take measures when the screen mechanism as the movable accessory does not normally operate without requiring special processing for eliminating the error.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prohibits the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 on the condition that an error has been continuously detected a predetermined number of times. Thus, it is possible to prevent the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from being prohibited when an error regarding the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is erroneously detected.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs an initialization operation (so-called “power-on reset”) when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on, so that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. The error relating to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 for eliminating the error relating to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be reset when the power is turned on. It is possible to take measures when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 does not operate normally without requiring special processing.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the image display device 201a that can display information related to the game in addition to the display unit 100 that displays the video for performance during the unit game. Even during the game, information about the game can be displayed without interrupting the performance.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays a user interface image for starting the recording of game information in accordance with the operation of the touch sensor 201b even during the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to start recording game information from the unit game without interrupting the performance.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment turns on the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b, which are the light sources of the decoration portions 22a and 22b, with low brightness even when the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state. In order to make it easy to visually recognize the pattern decorated in the decoration portions 22a and 22b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where the game state is lit before and when the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state. .

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the protective cover 20 has a light shielding property of a predetermined ratio with respect to the light incident from the outside to the inside, and thus the visibility of the image displayed on the display unit by the external light is high. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment converts the light source data for turning off the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b into side lamp data to be turned on with a predetermined low brightness when turning off the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b. Since the lighting state of the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b is controlled based on the converted side lamp data, the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b are kept low during the period when the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b are requested to be turned off simply by converting the side lamp data. It can be lit with brightness.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light emission of the chance button LED 34 provided on the chance button 33 and the display of the video prompting the operation of the chance button 33 are interlocked, and the chance button LED 34 is turned off, Since the display of the video prompting the operation of the button 33 is linked, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number for lottery, so that the chance button 33 is operated as an opportunity. Can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

  When the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, an image imitating the shape of the chance button 33 is displayed at the approximate center of the display area of the display unit 100. Since it is displayed in the area, the operation of the chance button 33 can be urged visually.

  In addition, when the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, even if the chance button 33 is not operated, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. For example, since the effect is triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, the player's interest can be improved by the effect.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, even if the chance button 33 is not operated, for the next unit game Since an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed in response to the insertion of a medal, the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 can be executed almost certainly.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays an operation order notification image indicating the operation order of the stop operation so that the region for displaying the operation order notification image moves according to the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1. By switching to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the operation order notification video is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the reel screen mechanism F1 movable to the reel exposure position that is exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not in the reel exposure position. When an operation order notification image corresponding to one display area is displayed on the first display area of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position, the operation order notification image is displayed according to the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D. By displaying the operation order notification image in the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D, the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a front surface of the fixed screen mechanism D when the reel screen mechanism F1 movable to the reel exposure position that is exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not at the reel exposure position. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposure position, the operation order notification image is displayed in the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the visibility of the operation sequence notification video is ensured.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a combination of symbols based on the “triple chili lip” when the “triple chile lip” has an added value when the “triple chili lip” is won internally. The operation sequence of the stop operation to stop on the active line is notified, and when the “Triple Chile Lip” has no added value, the combination of the symbols based on the “Triple Chile Lip” is different from the combination of symbols. By informing the operation sequence of the stop operation to be stopped above, even if the combination of symbols based on “Triple Chile Lip” is stopped on the active line, the situation where the player cannot obtain added value is avoided. Yes.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the player to obtain no added value even if the combination of symbols based on the “triple chili lip” stops on the active line. It is possible to prevent the interest of the user from being reduced.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the step count F is detected when the front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. When the front standby position sensor E15a changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count F to "23". The error in the number of steps from when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the front screen mechanism E1 due to a deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since inconsistency can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that when the reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the step count R When the reel standby position sensor F19 changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count R to "3" when the detection state is changed to "2" and the detection state changes to the non-detection state. The error in the number of steps from when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the reel screen mechanism F1 due to a deviation between the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1. Since inconsistency can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment also counts the step count when the front exposure position sensor E15b for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. When the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count to “188” when the detection state is changed to “192” and the detection state is changed to the non-detection state, the detection is performed. An error in the number of steps from when the state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the front screen mechanism E1 due to a deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since inconsistency can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 131. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and control similar to the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 120, the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 120 is a game state transition flow regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. When the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 120 is compared with the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 36, the first embodiment and the second implementation are compared. The game is basically performed in the same flow as in the above-described form, but the game is performed in a different flow in the ART game state. That is, the control of CT in the ART gaming state is greatly different between the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination during a normal ART, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT.
On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. The MB (combination “F_MB”) is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second type special product. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 has the MB as an internal winning combination. When determined as a winning combination, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination “C_MB”) is displayed along the active line.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, a normal ART is set between MB non-flags in the ART gaming state, and CT is performed between MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during (H) normal ART. A game is played between the MB flags in the ART game state so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. In addition, the method of playing a game so that the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed. This can be realized by performing notification or notification of a pressing order without displaying a combination of symbols according to MB.

  On the other hand, when CT ends, MB winning is prompted (notified), and (I) when a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. Thereafter, when the end condition of the (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag state, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed between MB flags>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, the stop control different from that during the non-MB flag can be performed. For example, when a predetermined small combination is determined as an internal winning combination between the MB flag and during the non-MB flag, since the MB is carried over during the MB flag, the internal winning combination is “MB + predetermined small However, during MB non-flagging, the MB is not carried over, so the internal winning combination is only the “predetermined small combination”. In the pachislot machine, stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination. Therefore, even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and between the non-MB flags, different stop control is performed. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small combination can be different between MB flags and non-MB flags.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, display control is difficult (or impossible to display) during normal ART (between MB non-flags) by changing the stop control between MB flags and between MB non-flags. ) Various symbol combinations are displayed during CT (between MB flags). Hereinafter, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail while paying attention to differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning role and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment differ in the type of combination used and the type of combination of symbols, so this point will be described first.

(Types of roles used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_Chill Lip”, “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chick Lip”, “F_Leach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the roles “R_single dust 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust 4” are used instead of these roles.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” are used. In contrast, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” are used instead of these roles. In the following, the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push order bell”. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (MB “F_MB”) related to the MB that the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. Other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus description thereof is omitted.

(Types of symbol combinations used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilling eyes”, and “One piece” are used as combinations of symbols corresponding to the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”. A combination was used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, in addition to these symbol combinations, as symbol combinations corresponding to the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”, A combination of symbols “MB” and “cactus” is used. The combination of symbols “MB” may be arbitrary. The symbol combination of “cactus” may be the same as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the symbol combination of “bell”. (9 sheets).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during non-MB flag>
FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between an internal winning combination between MB non-flags and a combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 121, during the MB non-flag period, the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and the push order is “ In the case of “forward press”, the symbol combination “replay” is displayed along the active line. On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than “forward pressing”, the symbol combination “Chilli Lip” is displayed along the active line in the correct pressing sequence, and the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed in the incorrect pressing sequence. Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4”, the combination of symbols “Single Chilli Lip” is displayed in the case of the correct pressing order for each role. In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order for each combination, a symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combinations “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”, the combination of symbols of “2 Series Chile Lip” is displayed in the case of the correct pressing order for each role. In the case of incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combinations “F_3 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each role, the combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip” is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed.

  In addition, during the MB non-flag, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order. In the case of pressing order, the combination of symbols of “Bell” is displayed. In the case of the pressing order of incorrect answer for each role, the combination of symbols of “Bell spilling eyes” or “1 sheet appearance” is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol between MB flags>
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between MB flags and the combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 122, among the MB flags, the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_3 Chilli Lip 4” are displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the combination “F_MB” and any one of the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, The combination of “Chilelip” symbols is displayed along the active line.

  More specifically, in the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4”, the combination of symbols of “Single Chilli Lip” is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. ~ "F_2 Series Chile Lip 4" displays the combination of symbols of "2 Series Chile Lip" along the active line regardless of the order of pressing, and "F_3 Series Chile Lip 1" to "F_3 Series Chile Lip 4" The combination of symbols of “Triple Chile Lip” is displayed along the active line.

  When comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the roles “F_single dust 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust 4” are displayed according to the pressing order during the non-MB flag. While the combination of symbols is different, it does not affect the combination of symbols in which the pressing order is displayed during the MB flag.

  In addition, among the MB flags, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and are determined for each combination. In accordance with the pressing order, a combination of symbols “bell”, “bell spilled or one-shot”, “cactus” and “MB” is displayed. When comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, when the combination “push order bell” wins, more kinds of symbol combinations than during the non-MB flag. Can be displayed. Specifically, the combination of symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing during the non-MB flag period, while depending on the pressing order during the MB flag period. A combination of symbols “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” and the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order” between the MB flags. The stop control for the bell 6 is different from the stop control for the roles “F_single dust 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust 4” and the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” during non-MB flagging. .

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Next, the flow of games during normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single dust 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust 4” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. The pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART. In order to display the combination of symbols, the number of ART games is added. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “replay” is performed without adding the number of ART games.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the additional amount of ART games when winning the flag conversion lottery is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 determines the smallest additional amount when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4”, The next smallest addition amount is determined in the case of “F_2 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive dust lip 4”, and the largest additional amount is determined in the case of “F_3 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust lip 4”. To do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is made to display a combination of symbols of “Chilelip”, and therefore, for the player, the amount of addition increases as more Chile symbols are displayed. Become.

[Data table in normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The data tables shown in FIGS. 123 and 124 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 123 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during normal ART according to the second embodiment. The ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information that is controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information that is controlled in the same manner as the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” to the role “Chilli Lip” using this ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not to do so is lottery (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pushing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of incorrect answers for each winning combination through the display unit 100.

<Normal lottery table during ART>
FIG. 124 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery for adding the number of ART games to be added during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during the normal ART defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery using the extra lottery table during the normal ART. The corresponding added game number is added (added to the ART end game number counter). In the figure, the lottery value information associated with the winning combination “Single Chile Lip” includes the internal winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4” when winning the flag conversion lottery. The lottery value information referred to in this case and associated with the winning combination “Two Series Chile Lip” includes the internal winning combinations when winning the flag conversion lottery in the “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”. The lottery value information that is referred to in some cases and associated with the winning combination “Third-time Chile Lip” is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is “F_Third Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Third Chilli Lip 4”. It is referred to when

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a flow of games during CT of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is greatly different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the management method of the CT duration. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of the CT by one set of 8 games, but the pachislot machine of the second embodiment. 1, the main control board 71 is based on the number of medals to be paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting “the number of medals used in the game” from the “number of medals to be paid out”). Manage the duration of CT.

Specifically, the main control board 71 terminates the CT when the difference number in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, when the winning “push order bell” wins, the main control board 71 performs a notification for winning the MB. ). Here, when the symbol combination of “bell” and “cactus” is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, when the symbol combination of “bell” is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT When the flag conversion lottery is not won), the difference number of sheets (6 sheets) in which the duration of CT has increased is consumed.
On the other hand, when the symbol combination “cactus” is displayed during CT (more specifically, when a flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Then, the duration of CT is maintained.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when a combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 change the pressing order in which the combination of symbols of “cactus” is displayed for each combination won through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the information is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Announces the pressing order.

  When the symbol combination “bell” or “cactus” is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by six and digests the duration of the CT. In this case, the main control board 71 adds not only the difference number but also the CT end number to six. As a result, although the difference number during CT has increased by 6 along with the display of the symbol combination “cactus”, the end number of CT has also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, Will be maintained.

  This flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a CT meter having a plurality of stages from “1” to “MAX” is provided. The higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

  The CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the “F_single tip 1” to “F_3 consecutive tip” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the main control board 71 is lowest when the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. The CT meter is promoted with a probability, and when the roles “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning roles, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and used during the CT. When “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

  Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the “push order bell” in CT, the CT meter is demoted. Note that the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the flag conversion lottery is not won, or may necessarily demote the CT meter.

  Also, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Continuous Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, the number of ART games is added. The additional amount of the ART game number varies depending on the number of displayed Chile symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the main control board 71 plays a role “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” during CT. ”To“ F_Single Chilli Lip 4 ”is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and during the CT, the“ F_2 Series Chili Lip 1 ”to“ F_2 Series Chili Lip 4 ”is determined as the internal winning combination. The next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combinations “F_3 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table in CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. The data tables shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 126 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the flag conversion lottery table during ART to change the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” to “cactus”. Whether or not to convert is lottery (flag conversion lottery). When this flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “cactus” for each combination won through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the pressing order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are combined with a symbol of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The order of pressing for displaying is notified.

  Referring to FIG. 126, it can be understood that the flag conversion lottery during CT is more likely to win as the CT meter value is higher. When the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is always won. I understand that. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of the CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, the CT continues without ending. If the CT does not end, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter becomes “MAX”, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing. Further, it is also possible to apply both of the demoteing of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets.

  When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from “1” to “MAX”, for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played since the CT meter became “MAX”. Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery is performed eight times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. The value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary. For example, the CT meter may be demoted to CT meter “1”, demoted to CT meter “7”, or CT meter “1”. The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from “7” to “7”.

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 127 is a CT meter promotion lottery table used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the CT meter promotion lottery in association with the current CT meter value and internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 127, the probabilities of winning the CT meter promotion lottery are the lowest in the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 4” and “F_2 Double Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Double Chile Lip 4”. Next, it is found that the roles “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are the highest. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at a time.

<Casting lottery table during CT>
Next, FIG. 128 is an extra lottery table during CT used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery using the extra lottery table during CT, and when the extra lottery is won, the corresponding extra number of games is added ( It is added to the ART end game number counter).

  Referring to FIG. 128, the amount of addition of the number of ART games in CT is the smallest in the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4”, and the roles “F_2 continuity lip 1” to “F_2 continuation lip 4”. Next, it is found that there are few, and the roles “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are the most numerous. More specifically, in the roles “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 or more games is added, and two Chile symbols are displayed. In “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”, the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the roles “F_3 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4”, The number of ART games over 30 games is added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chile symbols displayed during CT.

[Game flow in CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a flow of games in the CZ of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs as in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of CZ3 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of CZ1 and 2 is the same as that of the first embodiment. It is different from the pachislot machine 1 of.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into a first half and a second half, and ranks (modes and points) having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery are promoted in the first half. In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect (see FIG. 54). As shown in FIG. 129, the basic flow in the CZ1 and CZ2 is the same as that in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the end conditions of the first half. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is terminated based on the number of continued games. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CZ1 is a continuous game. The first half is terminated based on the number, but CZ2 terminates the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both the CZ1 and CZ2 perform the lock lottery in the first half, and when the lock lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 and 2 is also ended.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a game and lock lottery. This lock lottery is a process of lottery whether or not to perform a game lock based on an internal winning combination. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and performs a game lock (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ1 and continues the first half of CZ1 until 15 games have elapsed in the first half of CZ1.

  The main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half when the first half of CZ1 wins 15 games or when a lottery is won. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59A and 59C), a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery. When the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via the ART preparation. .

  On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the main control board 71 performs a lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 58), detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is terminated and shifted to the second half while the end lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

  Further, in the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ2 and performs a game lock. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ2 and continues the first half of CZ2 until winning the end lottery.

When the main lottery board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59B and 59C), a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery.
When the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via the ART preparation. .

  Thus, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that each game and lock lottery are performed in the first half of the CZs 1 and 2. The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is determined not by the number of continued games but by the end lottery. Different.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, a data table used in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 130 and 131 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 130 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of the CZ2 according to the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 130, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as an internal winning combination, an end lottery is performed, and this end lottery is won with high probability. I understand that. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the combination “Replay” is any one of the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip A” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd”. In the pachislot machine, since the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined (about 1 / 7.3) or more, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It can be seen that the situation occurs relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
FIG. 131 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 131 (A) is a lock used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 131 (B) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  131A and 131B, it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 wins with a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) has elapsed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and when the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is completed, ART lottery is performed based on the result of this rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is indefinite.

  In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination “Replay” is determined as an internal winning combination, a higher ranking lottery is performed during CZ2 than during CZ1. It is easy to receive fewer opportunities. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in CZ2 than in CZ1. Thereby, even if it is CZ2 which tends to reduce the opportunity to receive a rank-up lottery, it can have an expectation for transfer to ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modification of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

<CT sign game and notification lottery>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when the transition is made between MB flags during normal ART, the transition from the next game to CT is made immediately. It is good also as putting a predetermined number of precursor games after shifting to.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (A), when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB non-flags to the MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), if the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Chilli Lip 4” is won, the number of ART games is added (see FIG. 124). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between MB flags is performed on the main side (main control board 71) in order to affect the privilege granted to the player.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols of “Chilli lip” is always displayed regardless of the order of pressing when it is between MB flags, the sign game is performed between MB flags. In such a case, the player may know from the stop control (the combination of displayed symbols) that the player is playing foreplay. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, during the time between MB non-flags, a combination of symbols “Chilli Lip” is not displayed when the combination “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_3 Continuous Chili Lip 4” is won. When the combination of symbols of “Chilelip” is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that the MB flag is in the middle (predictor game).

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, when the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during the MB flag, the push order is dared to be notified. As described above, when the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, the symbol combination “Chile Lip” is displayed regardless of the order of pressing. However, when the order of pressing is notified, the player recognizes that the symbol combination “Chilli Lip” is displayed according to the notified pressing order, and that the player is in the middle of the MB flag. It can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, since such notification of the pushing order does not have any influence on the player's profit, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, a lottery (notification of whether to notify the pushing order during the MB flag) (Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but the main side data capacity can be determined by performing the lottery on the sub side that does not affect the player's profit as in this modification. This is preferable because the processing load can be reduced.

  FIG. 132 (B) is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. The notification lottery table indicating the CT sign defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

  When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table indicating the CT precursor is won, the sub control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation at the time of pushing the bell between MB flags>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment described above, when the combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, during the period between MB non-flags, the combination of symbols “Bell” and “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing, while between MB flags, “ A combination of symbols of “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the push order necessary to display the combination of symbols of “cactus” that can be displayed only during the MB flag is notified during CT between the MB flags. It is said.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, the notification contents are made different according to the state until the MB start.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when an MB is determined as an internal winning combination during a normal ART, the gaming state shifts between MB flags, and thereafter CT is performed. In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after moving between MB flags, the states between MB flags are divided into “predictor game” state, “CT” state, and “MB waiting” state. be able to.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, when an MB is won during normal ART, a “precursor game” state between MB flags is entered, after which a predetermined number of precursor games are performed and CT starts. The “CT” state during the MB flag is entered, and thereafter, when the CT ends, the “MB waiting” state is entered until the MB wins.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the contents of notification when the winning combination “push order bell” is won differ depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, in the “predictive game” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Announces the pressing order. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” or “cactus” is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the “CT” state, the push order according to either “Bell” or “Cactus” is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

  In the “MB standby” state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify any combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” is displayed, and the pressing order in which the symbol combination “cactus” is displayed. It is good also as notifying, and it is good also as notifying the pushing order in which the combination of the symbol of "MB" is displayed.

  On the other hand, during the normal ART, since the symbol combination “cactus” cannot be displayed, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” is displayed.

[Effects of Pachislot Machine of Second Embodiment]
Heretofore, the second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the MB flag, more types of symbol combinations can be displayed when the combination “push order bell” is won than during the non-MB flag. Specifically, the combination of symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing during the non-MB flag period, while depending on the pressing order during the MB flag period. A combination of symbols “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed.

  Thereby, without increasing the types of winning combinations, the types of symbol combinations displayed between the MB flags can be increased, and the games between the MB flags can be made diverse. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of “cactus” symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles between MB flags, and the appearance frequency of rare roles without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the “push order bell” is changed, it is possible to increase the appearance frequency of a rare combination with a medal payout. .

  In addition, when the combination of symbols of “cactus” is continuously displayed during the MB flag, it is known that the MB flag is being used. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, only when the flag conversion lottery is won, the symbol combination of “cactus” is notified, and when it is non-winning, the symbol combination of “bell” is notified. To do. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification contents by flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of “cactus” between MB flags can be adjusted, and the gameability between MB flags can be diversified. Can do.

(Gameability during CT)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, CT that is an extra chance zone for adding the number of ART games is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continued until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets) during the MB flag. During this CT, if the flag conversion lottery is not won at the time of winning the “push order bell”, the difference number increases and the duration of the CT is consumed. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is won, the number of finishes increases as the difference number increases. And the duration of CT is maintained. Thereby, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, CT is changed according to the combination of symbols to be displayed (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery) while changing the stop control during the MB flag. Since the continuation period can be controlled, the gameability between MB flags can be diversified.

  At this time, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, so the CT duration is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. can do. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, and demoted when non-winning the flag lottery during CT, The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during CT, and can diversify the game characteristics between MB flags.

  In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery must be won for a predetermined period. Will improve.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and non-MB flags)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, not only the combination of symbols displayed when winning the “push order bell” is different between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags, The combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning “Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Chile Lip” is also different. That is, the symbol combination “Replay” or “Chile Lip” is displayed during the MB non-flag period, while the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed during the MB flag interval. Only the symbol combination of “Chilelip” is displayed.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the non-MB flag. The flag conversion lottery between MB flags is a lottery of the combination of symbols of “Bell” or “Cactus” to be notified when the winning “push order bell” is won. The flag conversion lottery is for lottery from among the combinations of symbols of “Replay” or “Chilli Lip” to be notified when the winning combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip” is won. In this way, by performing flag conversion lottery both between MB flags and between MB non-flags, it is possible to control the combination of symbols displayed both between MB flags and between MB non-flags, It is possible to improve gameability between both flags and between non-flags.

  At this time, for the flag conversion lottery between MB flags, the winning probability is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and for the flag conversion lottery between MB non-flags, the winning probability is adjusted based on the ART level and lottery state. The Thereby, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the gameability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags, it may be known that the MB flag is being determined from the displayed combination of symbols. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment dares to notify the originally unnecessary push order during the MB flag, making it difficult to grasp that the MB flag is being used. Then, by managing the notification of the pushing order on the sub side, the data capacity and processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bell navigation between flags and non-flags)
For example, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main monitor is notified by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. In addition, since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example is shown in FIG. 78 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 78, while “white 7 navigation” and “blue 7 navigation” are performed during the inter-flag state, “bell navigation” is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. “Bell Navi” or the like may be performed during the state.

  In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 78 (A) and 78 (B), when “Bell Navi” is performed in the non-flag state, numerical values “1” to “3” (push order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ) On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, when “Bell Navi” is performed in the inter-flag state, numerical values “12” to “14” (push order first instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. It is good. Note that the sub-side navigation performed through the display unit 100 may be common in both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the numerical value for performing “Bell Navi” between MB non-flags is different from the numerical value for performing “Bell Navi” between MB flags. It is also possible to make it.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not a privilege is granted based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but is not limited thereto. .
That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, displayed when a stop operation is performed according to the notification. The combination of symbols will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on a combination of actually displayed symbols.

  In this case, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the symbol combination displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the symbol combination displayed without following the notification. It is good also as not giving a privilege. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation. In such a case, there is a possibility that a special symbol combination such as “Triple Chile Lip” will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is granted only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without giving the privilege. It is good as well.

(Information control that does not affect profits (privileges))
Also, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether the notification that affects profits is a notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the main side and a notification on the main side. In the notification that does not affect the profit, notification lottery is performed on the sub side, and whether or not notification is performed on the sub side is controlled. As an example of notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows a notification of “reach eye lip” during the precursor game, and the pachislot according to the second embodiment. In the machine 1, “Chilli lip” notification during the MB flag is shown. In this regard, notification that does not affect profits is not limited to these.

  In recent pachislot machines, there is a case where the game is shifted to a state where it is easy (hard) to perform game lock depending on the order of the stop operation. For example, transition to a state where it is easy to perform game lock when the order is “left, middle, right”, and transition to a state where it is difficult to perform game lock when the order is “right, middle, left” There is. In such a pachislot machine, the notification of the push order makes a transition to a state where it is easy (hard) to lock the game, but if the game lock affects the profit When it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, but whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect profits, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

  The case where whether or not the game lock is performed has an influence on the profit is, for example, that the game lock is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, thereby winning the ART lottery. This is the case (see FIG. 129). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during the sign game in which it is decided to grant the profit (privilege) By performing the game lock frequently, it is to show that the profit will be given in the subsequent game.

  FIG. 135A is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “left, middle, right” when the winning combination “F_maintenance lip A” is won, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. , “Left, Right, Middle”, “Middle, Left, Right”, “Middle, Right, Left” When the stop operation is performed, the current lock state is maintained, “Right, Left, Middle”, “Right When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “, middle, left”, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”. Similarly, when the winning combination “F_Maintenance Lip B” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the first push order, the lock state is changed from “0” to “1”, and the second push order is followed. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third push order, the lock state transits from “1” to “0”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), in order to simplify the description, the locked state “0” is set to a state where it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state “1” is set to a state where the game is easily locked. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more. In addition, in the case of three or more stages, multiple stages may be transitioned at once instead of transitioning one by one.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), when the game lock affects profits, a notification lottery on whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is displayed. Based on this, a predetermined pressing order is notified on both the main side and the sub side. On the other hand, if the game lock does not affect profits, the sub lot (sub control board 72) performs a lottery for determining whether or not to make a notification, and based on the lottery result, the sub side has a predetermined push order. Is notified.

  Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines where the game lock affects profits throughout the entire game period, there are pachislot machines where the game lock does not affect profits throughout the game period, There is a pachislot machine in which the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game while the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period in which the game lock affects profits, a notification lottery on whether to perform notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects profits, the sub lot performs a notification lottery on whether or not to perform the notification, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. It is good.

  Since the main control board 71 normally performs game lock, the main control board 71 has a function of changing the lock state in accordance with the pushing order shown in FIG. That is, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the game lock with a probability corresponding to the lock state set by the lock state setting unit that sets the lock state based on the detected order of stop operations. When the game lock determination means determined by the above and the game lock determination means determine that the game lock is performed, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 is a notification lottery unit that performs a notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the push order that the lock state setting unit sets a lock state in which the lock state is easy (hard) to perform the game lock. And it functions as a notifying means for notifying the predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notifying lottery means.

(Normal termination conditions for ART and CT)
The termination conditions for normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times information that is advantageous to the player during normal ART or CT, the number of predetermined games (for example, 50 games) Arbitrary end conditions such as the number of sets when 1) is set and the continuation rate at the end of the set can be adopted.

  Further, as the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, for example, a difference number (pure increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. It is good. In addition, the number of medals granted during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on actual values), and notification is made regardless of whether or not the number actually increased. It is also possible to calculate based on the number of medals scheduled to increase when complying with (calculation based on ideal values). The number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some roles that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or for a combination that switches between display / non-display of the combination of symbols depending on the timing of the stop operation, the corresponding combination is determined as an internal winning combination However, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (push order, timing))
Also, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is arbitrary, and it is possible to notify the order (pushing order) of the stop operation in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed. It is good also as notifying the timing (design which should be aimed) of stop operation required in order to be displayed.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range not affecting the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use a so-called “AT” and activate a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to replaying is increased, and a stop operation advantageous to the player It is good also as using what is called "ART" which alert | reports an aspect.

  In the embodiment of the present invention described above, the various control processes are divided into the main control process executed by the main CPU 93 and the sub control process executed by the sub CPU 102. However, various control processes included in the sub control process are described. The process may be executed by the main CPU 93, or the various processes included in the main control process may be executed by the sub CPU 102.

  Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the stop operation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is notified, the stop order of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is described as being notified, but each reel 3L, The stop positions of 3C and 3R may be notified, or a combination of the stop order of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R and the stop position may be notified.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the example in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachislot machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a pachinko gaming machine to be used.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, a pachislot machine 1 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 182. The pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is different from the first and second embodiments in the configuration of the display unit and the manner of effect using the display unit. Moreover, the point which provided the solid decoration provided with the decoration part which used the crystal as the motif on the side of the display unit differs from 1st and 2nd embodiment.
In the following description, detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first and second embodiments is omitted.

[Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137.
FIG. 136 is an overall perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 137 is a front view of the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar or corresponding to the structure in the pachislot machine of 1st and 2nd embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In FIG. 137, the protective cover 20 is not shown.

  Display unit 200 in the present embodiment is provided inside cabinet upper portion 61a. The display unit 200 is a projection mapping device that displays various images in accordance with the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72, similarly to the display unit 100 in the first and second embodiments described above. . The display unit 200 performs an effect according to the progress of the game above the display window 4 exposing a part of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (not shown). Details of the display unit 200 will be described later.

  Three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500 are provided on the side of the display unit 200 inside the protective cover 20 of the upper door 62a. Details of the three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500 will be described later.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the display unit 200 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
The display unit 200 in the present embodiment is different from the display unit 100 in the first and second embodiments described above in the configuration of the fixed screen mechanism. In the following description, the same points as those of the display unit 100 in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

(Outline of display unit 200)
First, an overview of the display unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the display unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. That is, FIG. 139 shows a vertical cross-sectional view at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the display unit 200 shown in FIG. 138. 140 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in FIG. 138. That is, FIG. 140 shows a horizontal cross-sectional view at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the display unit 200 shown in FIG. 138. FIG. 141 is a partial perspective view of the display unit of the present embodiment. In FIG. 141, the display of the irradiation light device B and the front screen mechanism E1 is omitted.
138 to 140 show the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 of the display unit 200 is disposed at the front exposure position (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the display unit 200 includes an irradiation light device B and a screen device C, similarly to the display unit 100 described above. Although the irradiation light device B of the display unit 200 and the irradiation light device B of the display unit 100 are slightly different in appearance, the main constituent members, structural features, and functions are the same. The detailed description about is omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
As shown in FIGS. 138 to 140, the screen device C of the display unit 200 includes a box-shaped screen casing C10. The screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end portion of the bottom plate C1, a left side plate C3 erected at the left end portion of the bottom plate C1, and a rear end portion of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected. Since the back plate C4 of the display unit 200 is the same as the back plate C4 of the display unit 100 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the display unit 200 are the same as the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the display unit 100 described above, although their main configurations and functions are the same. .

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
As shown in FIGS. 138 to 140, the bottom plate C <b> 1 of the screen casing C <b> 10 in the display unit 200 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view, similar to the bottom plate C <b> 1 in the display unit 100 described above. A fixed screen mechanism G, which will be described later, is placed at the center of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200.

Further, a groove (not shown) in which the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6 is fitted is formed at the left end portion of the upper surface of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200. Further, a groove (not shown) into which the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5 is fitted is formed at the right end portion on the upper surface of the bottom plate C1. The right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 support gears and motors that constitute the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The front part of the inner surfaces of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 is provided with a predetermined decoration, in this embodiment, a decoration with a rock motif.
The other points of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200 are the same as those of the above-described bottom plate C1 of the display unit 100, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right hidden wall C7, Left hidden wall C8)
As shown in FIGS. 138 to 141, the display unit 200 includes a right hidden wall portion C7 and a left hidden wall portion C8 formed in a flat plate shape. The right hidden wall C7 is disposed in the vicinity of the inside of the right side plate C2. Further, the left hidden wall portion C8 is disposed in the vicinity of the inside of the left side plate C3.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the right hidden wall portion C7 includes an outer surface C7a and an inner surface C7b orthogonal to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The outer surface C7a faces the inner surface of the right side plate C2. As shown in FIG. 141, a cylindrical wall support C7c extending outward in the left-right direction is provided from the vicinity of the vertical end of the outer surface C7a. Bolt holes (not shown) communicating with the bolt holes formed in the right side plate C2 are formed inside the wall support portion C7c, and bolts are inserted into these bolt holes from the outside of the right side plate C2. The right hidden wall portion C7 is supported by the right side plate C2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right hidden wall C7 covers the front part of the inner surface of the right plate C2 from the inside in front of the right movable body base C5. A decoration similar to the decoration applied to the front portion of the right movable body base C (decoration using a rock motif in the present embodiment) is applied to the lower part of the right hidden wall C7.

A semicircular cutout C7d is formed from the upper part of the right hidden wall C7 to the substantially central part. The notch C7d is formed so that the right end of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 and the right hidden wall C7 do not interfere with each other.
The left hidden wall portion C8 is substantially symmetrical with the right hidden wall portion C7, and accordingly, the corresponding reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the display unit 200, by providing the right hidden wall portion C7 and the left hidden wall portion C8, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the inside of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 that are not decorated. .

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 139, in the screen casing C10 of the display unit 200, as in the above-described display unit 100, a plurality of display devices that cause an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are used. A screen mechanism is provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. In the display unit 200, a fixed screen mechanism G, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as screen mechanisms.

Since the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, the reel screen mechanism F1 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are the same as these mechanisms of the display unit 100 described above, description thereof is omitted here. Further, since the positional relationship (see FIGS. 20 to 22) of the fixed screen mechanism G, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is similar to the positional relationship of these screen mechanisms in the display unit 100, the description here will be given. Omitted.
Hereinafter, the fixed screen mechanism G having a configuration different from the fixed screen mechanism D of the display unit 100 will be described in detail.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G)
First, an outline of the fixed screen mechanism G will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the fixed screen mechanism G, and shows a mode in which the fixed screen mechanism G is placed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10. FIG. 143 is an exploded view of the fixed screen mechanism G. FIG.

  142 and 143, the fixed screen mechanism G includes a louver screen G1, a louver drive mechanism G2, and a rear screen G3.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Louver drive mechanism G2)
As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the louver driving mechanism G2 is placed on the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, and includes three sets of louver driving portions G4, G5, G6 and a cover body G7. The cover body G7 includes a substantially flat lower cover G8 whose lower surface is fixed to the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, and an upper cover G9 that covers the lower cover G8 from above.

  The upper cover part G9 has an upper surface part G10 formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the left-right direction of the pachislot machine 1 and whose short direction coincides with the front-rear direction of the pachislot machine 1. A frame-like side surface portion G11 extending downward along the vertical direction is formed at the rear end portion in the front-rear direction and the both end portions in the left-right direction of the upper surface portion G10. The lower end portion of the side surface portion G11 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate C1.

  The front portion of the upper surface portion G10 is formed with a slope portion G12 that bulges in the left-right direction and is inclined so as to approach the upper surface of the bottom plate C1 as it goes forward. The upper cover part G9 and the lower cover part G8 constitute a substantially box-shaped cover body 7, and an accommodation space is formed inside the cover body G7. A plurality of gears included in the louver driving units G4, G5, and G6 are accommodated in the accommodation space. Details of the louver driving units G4, G5, and G6 will be described later.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Louver screen G1)
As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the louver screen G1 includes louver plates G13, G14, and G15, which are substantially rectangular flat members. The louver plate G13 includes a pair of long side portions G17 and a short side portion G18. A pair of long side part G17 is extended in parallel along the up-down direction.

  A lower shaft portion G19 extending downward is provided at a substantially central portion of the short side portion G18 positioned below. Further, an upper shaft portion G20 that extends upward is formed in the approximate center of the short side portion 18 located above. The lower shaft portion G19 is connected to the louver drive portion G4, and the upper shaft portion G20 is inserted into a bearing portion G30 of the rear screen G3 described later. Accordingly, the louver plate G13 is supported by the louver drive mechanism G2 and the rear screen G3 so as to be rotatable around the upper shaft portion G20 and the lower shaft portion G19.

The louver plate G13 has a first surface G21a and a second surface G21b (see FIG. 140) on which an image is projected. In the present embodiment, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts, and for convenience of explanation, one surface is referred to as the first surface G21a and the other surface is the second surface. This is referred to as a surface G21b.
Note that the louver plate G14 and the louver plate G15 have the same configuration as the louver plate G13, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Rear screen G3)
Subsequently, the rear screen G3 in the fixed screen mechanism G will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the rear screen G3 shown in FIG.

  142 to 144, the rear screen G3 is a member that is placed on the upper surface portion G10 of the cover body G7 and rotatably supports the louver plates G13, G14, G15, and includes a curved portion G22 and a frame. Part G23. The curved portion G22 includes a flat plate-like rear plate portion G24 that stands substantially perpendicular to the upper surface portion G10, and two side plate portions G25 that are continuous with both ends in the left-right direction of the rear plate portion G24.

  The side plate portion G25 is a curved plate-like member that stands substantially perpendicular to the upper surface portion G10. The side plate portion G25 is curved with a predetermined curvature so that the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion on the side continuous with the rear plate portion G24 in the left-right direction is positioned forward. In the present embodiment, the predetermined curvature is set so as not to interfere with the rotating louver plates G13 and G15 (see FIG. 140). It should be noted that the side plate portion G25 can be curved in any manner as long as interference with the louver plates G13 and G15 can be avoided.

  Moreover, the bending part G22 has the flat top-plate part G26 which forms the upper part of the bending part G22, and is arrange | positioned substantially horizontal with respect to the upper surface part G10. The edge portion of the top plate portion G26 is continuous with the upper end portions of the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the frame part G23 is a member that is disposed in front of the bending part G22 and is formed in a frame shape surrounding the front edge part of the top plate part G26 and the side plate part G25. The inner edge of the frame part G23 is continuous with the front edge part of the top plate part G26 and the side plate part G25. The frame part G23 has two side frame parts G28 standing upright substantially perpendicular to the upper surface part G10, and an upper frame part G29 continuous with the upper ends of the two side frame parts G28. The upper frame part G29 is provided with a bearing part G30 into which the upper shaft parts G20 of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are inserted.

  As will be described later, an image is projected on the inner side of the frame portion G23 and the curved portion G22 of the rear screen G3 (the front surfaces of the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25).

(Display unit 200: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism G: louver drive mechanism G2: louver drive units G4, G5, G6)
Subsequently, the louver driving units G4, G5, and G6 of the louver driving mechanism G2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143, 145, and 146. FIG.
FIG. 145 is a bottom view of the fixed screen mechanism G. FIG. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of a louver drive gear which is a member constituting the louver drive unit. In addition, in FIG. 145, illustration of the lower cover part G8 is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the louver driving unit G4 drives the louver plate G13. The louver driving unit G5 drives the louver plate G14. And the louver drive part G6 drives the louver board G15. The louver driving units G4, G5, and G6 have the same configuration, and therefore, in the following description, the louver driving unit G4 will be described, and the description of the louver driving units G5, G6 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 145, the louver drive unit G4 includes a two-phase excitation stepping motor G31, a plurality of gears, and a sensor G40.
The stepping motor G31 is electrically connected to the sub control board 72. That is, the driving of the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 34) of the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32). In this embodiment, the stepping motor is controlled by the two-phase excitation method, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stepping motor may be controlled by the one-phase excitation method or the 1-2 phase excitation method.

  The stepping motor G31 is mounted on the upper cover part G9 from above and is fixed with screws (see FIG. 140). In addition, the stepping motor G31 is disposed behind the rear screen G3 (see FIG. 140).

  Here, for example, when the fixing position of the stepping motor G31 is set below the louver plate G13 to be driven, it is necessary to provide a space for arranging the stepping motor G31 below the louver plate G13. Since the space for accommodating the display unit 200 is limited, if a space for accommodating the stepping motor G31 is provided below the louver plate G13, the length of the louver plate G13 in the vertical direction must be shortened. For this reason, it is conceivable that a region where an image is projected on the louver plate G13 becomes narrow. On the other hand, when the fixing position of the stepping motor G31 is set behind the rear screen G3 as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to shorten the length of the louver plate G13 in the vertical direction. Can be secured in a desired area.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 145, the plurality of gears include a motor connection gear G32 connected to the drive shaft of the stepping motor G31, a louver drive gear G33 connected to the lower shaft portion G19 of the louver plate G13, It is comprised from the transmission gear G34. The motor connection gear G32, the louver drive gear G33, and the transmission gear G34 are accommodated in an accommodation space formed inside the cover body 7.

  The transmission gear G34 has a small gear G35 and a large gear G36 having a larger reference circle diameter than the small gear G35. The small gear G35 and the large gear G36 have the same rotating shaft and are integrally formed. The transmission gear G34 is rotatably fixed to the upper cover part G9 with screws.

  The motor connection gear G32 meshes with the large gear G36 of the transmission gear G34. Further, the small gear G35 of the transmission gear G34 meshes with the louver drive gear G33. Thus, when the stepping motor G31 is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the louver drive gear G33 via the motor connection gear G32 and the transmission gear G34. As a result, the louver drive gear G33 is driven (rotated), and accordingly, the louver plate G13 connected to the louver drive gear G33 is rotated.

  The gear ratio of the motor connection gear G32, the transmission gear G34, and the louver drive gear G33 is set so that the louver plate G13 rotates once when the stepping motor G31 is driven one step. By setting in this way, the precision of the operation of the louver plate G13 can be enhanced. Thereby, when projecting an image on the louver plate G13, it is possible to prevent the image from being distorted due to the louver plate G13 being at a position shifted from a predetermined rotational position.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the louver drive gear G33 has two protrusions G41 that protrude outward in the circumferential direction. The two protrusions G41 are arranged on the same radial straight line passing through the center of the louver drive gear G33.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the sensor G40 is a photosensor having a light emitting unit that emits predetermined light and a light receiving unit that can receive light emitted from the light emitting unit. The sensor G40 is fixed to the upper cover part G9 with screws. The position where the sensor G40 is fixed is set so that the protruding portion G41 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion when the louver drive gear G33 is at a predetermined rotational position. The sensor G40 is electrically connected to the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32), and outputs a predetermined detection signal indicating whether or not the light receiving unit receives light from the light emitting unit.

(Positional relationship between louver plate and louver drive gear and sensor detection status)
Subsequently, the positional relationship between the louver plate and the louver drive gear and the detection state of the sensor will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the louver plate and the louver drive gear. In FIG. 147, the outline of the louver plate G15 is indicated by a chain line. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotated, and (a) shows the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above. (B) shows the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate rotates clockwise as viewed from above, and (c) is a table showing the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotating. .

  As shown in FIG. 147, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are positioned parallel to the left-right direction of the pachislot machine 1 (that is, positioned parallel to the player), the first of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 The surface G21a is flush. At this time, one protrusion G41 of the louver drive gear G33 of the louver drive units G4, G5, G6 that drives the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the sensor G40. .

  Next, the case where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c). In FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14 and G15 which are flush with each other as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 located at the front origin are rotated by 6 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, 6 degrees from the front origin, one protrusion G41. Is removed from between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40, and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40 can receive light from the light emitting portion.

  In addition, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated by 174 steps of the stepping motor G31 from the state shown in FIG. 147, that is, 174 degrees from the front origin, the other protrusion G41 is connected to the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the sensor G40. Intervene between. That is, the light receiving unit of the sensor G40 cannot receive light from the light emitting unit (cannot receive light). In FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), the position where the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are further rotated by 6 steps from that time, that is, the position rotated 180 degrees from the front origin is shown as the back origin. In the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin, the surface opposite to the first surface G21a, that is, the second surface G21b (see FIG. 140), which is flush with the front origin, is flush. It becomes.

  When the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin are rotated by 6 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, 6 degrees from the back origin, the other protrusion G41 is detached from between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the sensor G40. The light receiving unit of the sensor G40 can receive light from the light emitting unit. Further, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin are rotated by 174 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, 174 degrees from the back origin (or 354 degrees from the front origin), one projection G41 is moved to the sensor G40. Between the light emitting part and the light receiving part. That is, the light receiving unit of the sensor G40 cannot receive light from the light emitting unit. When the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are further rotated by 6 steps from this state, the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are returned to the front origin. That is, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate 360 degrees.

  In addition, about the case where louver board G13, G14, G15 rotates counterclockwise seeing from the upper direction from the state shown in FIG. 147, it showed in FIG. 148 (b). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as in the case of the rotation.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor)
Subsequently, an excitation mode of the stepping motor will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the excitation mode of the stepping motor. FIG. 149 shows a mode when the louver plate is rotated at the highest speed, and FIG. 149 shows a mode when the louver plate is normally rotated. FIG. 150 shows an excitation mode of the stepping motor when the backlash operation is performed, (a) shows a mode of 30 degree backlash operation, and (b) shows a mode of 15 degree backlash operation.

  As described above, the driving of the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 34) of the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32). That is, the sub CPU 102 can drive and control the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 at any rotation direction and rotation speed by controlling the drive direction and drive speed of the drive shaft of the stepping motor G31.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: fastest rotation)
With reference to FIG. 149 (a), the excitation mode of the stepping motor G31 when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are driven at the highest speed in the present embodiment will be described. In FIG. 149 (a), “CW” of “CW / CWW” in the rotation direction row indicates that the rotation direction of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is clockwise, and “CWW” indicates that the rotation direction is counterclockwise. It shows that there is. That is, “CW / CWW” indicates that control is possible in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction. The sub CPU 102 sets the rotation direction to either “CW” or “CWW” when controlling the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15. In addition, “2-2 phase” in the excitation mode row indicates that the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the two-phase excitation method.

  As shown in the “No. 1” row, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are driven at the highest speed in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 first has a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pulses per second ( In the following, a pulse of “pps” may be input to the stepping motor G31, and the stepping motor G31 is driven four steps from the origin (front origin or back origin). The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rotation per minute (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “rpm”). Note that “slow-up” in the remarks column means an acceleration state at the start of rotation.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 2” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 by four steps. At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 3” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a frequency of 500 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by an arbitrary number of steps. . The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

  The arbitrary number of steps is set according to the number of steps when the sensor G40 detects the protrusion G41 when stopping the louver plates G13, G14, G15. For example, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are stopped by rotating half a turn from the origin (front origin or back origin), that is, by rotating 180 degrees, the number of steps in the acceleration state from the number of steps 180 (No. .1 and No. 2 row), and 166 steps obtained by subtracting 6 steps from the detection of the projection G41 by the sensor G40 to the origin. Similarly, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated once from the front origin (or back origin), that is, 360 degrees and stopped, the number of steps is 346.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 4” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by the number of steps of six. At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm. As shown in the remarks column, when the stepping motor G31 is driven for 6 steps, the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 become the origin (front origin or back origin).

  Next, as shown in the row of “No. 5”, the sub CPU 102 controls to maintain an arbitrary excitation state until the magnet rotor of the stepping motor G31 stops (hereinafter referred to as “stop excitation” in some cases). .)I do. As a result, as shown in the row “No. 6”, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: normal rotation)
Next, with reference to FIG. 149 (b), an excitation mode of the stepping motor G31 when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotationally driven at a normal speed in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in the row “No. 1”, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotationally driven at the normal speed in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 first has a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pps. A pulse is input to the stepping motor G31, and the stepping motor G31 is driven by four steps from the origin (front origin or back origin). The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 2” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by an arbitrary number of steps. . At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row “No. 3”, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by the number of steps of six. At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm. As shown in the remarks column, when the stepping motor G31 is driven for 6 steps, the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 become the origin (front origin or back origin).

  Next, as shown in the row “No. 4”, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described stop excitation. As a result, as shown in the row “No. 5”, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped.

  The above-described excitation mode is merely an example, and the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the time of the fastest rotation and the normal rotation, that is, the driving speed of the stepping motor G31 can be arbitrarily set. However, it is desirable to set the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 in each state, that is, the driving speed of the stepping motor G31 to be in the range of 200 pps to 500 pps. By setting in this way, the stepping motor that rotates in synchronization with the pulse can reduce the risk of out-of-step, which is a state where it loses synchronization due to a sudden speed change or overload, and is no longer synchronized with the input pulse. it can.

  Further, by setting as described above, it is possible to reduce the risk of resonance that occurs when the frequency of the input pulse matches the natural vibration frequency of the rotor. In stepping motors, there is generally one region in the region of 100 pps to 200 pps of the frequency of the input pulse and one region in the region of frequencies higher than 500 pps. Resonance appears as a sudden torque loss or drop at a certain speed. For this reason, a step may be missing (miss step), or synchronization may be lost.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: backlash operation: backlash operation of 30 degrees)
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the excitation mode during the play operation will be described. Here, the “backlash operation” is an operation in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 stop immediately after the rotation starts. First, with reference to FIG. 150 (a), a description will be given of an excitation mode of a 30-degree backlash operation, that is, an operation in which the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 start rotating and stop at a position rotated 30 degrees from the rotation start position. .

  As shown in the row “No. 1”, the sub CPU 102 first inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pps, to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 by four steps. The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rps.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 2” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 by four steps. At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 3” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a frequency of 500 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by the number of 22 steps. The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

Next, as shown in the row “No. 4”, the sub CPU 102 performs stop excitation. As a result, as shown in the row “No. 5”, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped.
By the excitation control of the sub CPU 102 described above, a backlash operation is performed in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 stop at a position rotated 30 degrees from the rotation start position.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: loose operation: 15 degree play)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150 (b), description will be given of the excitation mode in the case of 15-degree backlash operation, that is, the operation in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 stop at a position rotated 15 degrees from the rotation start position after the start of rotation. To do.

  As shown in the row “No. 1”, the sub CPU 102 first inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pps, to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 by four steps. The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rps.

  Next, as shown in the “No. 2” row, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 by four steps. At this time, the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row “No. 3”, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a frequency of 500 pps, to the stepping motor G31 and drives the stepping motor G31 by the number of steps of seven. The rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

Next, as shown in the row “No. 4”, the sub CPU 102 performs stop excitation. As a result, as shown in the row “No. 5”, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped.
By the excitation control of the sub CPU 102 described above, a backlash operation is performed in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 stop at a position rotated 15 degrees from the rotation start position.

  When the excitation control shown in the table of 150 (a) or (b) is set as one set, and the rotation directions are made coincident and a plurality of sets of excitation control are performed, the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rattled in one direction. The driving of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 can be controlled so as to operate in the same manner.

  Also, when performing multiple sets of excitation control, if the rotation direction is set in the opposite direction for each set, that is, after one set of CCW (counterclockwise) excitation control, one set of CW (clockwise) excitation control. When this is repeated, the driving of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be controlled so that the louver plates G13, G14, G15 reciprocate back and forth at the rotation start position.

  In the excitation control shown in FIGS. 150 (a) and 150 (b), no. In the third row, the example in which the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 is controlled to 83.3 rpm has been described, but the rotational speed can be arbitrarily set. For example, the rotation speed during the normal rotation described above, that is, the rotation speed may be controlled to 55.5 rpm.

(Fixed screen mechanism)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 151, a coating aspect of the fixed screen mechanism will be described. FIG. 151 is a view for explaining a painting mode of the fixed screen mechanism. In FIG. 151, the louver plates G13 and G14 are not shown for convenience of explanation.

  The shaded area in FIG. 151 is a portion to be coated with white ink after painting with silver special color ink (ink that can contain aluminum or nickel pigment to give silver metallic luster). Show.

  Specifically, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 of the louver screen G1, and the front side of the upper cover part G9 of the louver drive mechanism G2 are painted as described above. Further, the inside of the frame part G23 and the curved part G22 of the rear screen G3 (the front surfaces of the rear plate part G24 and the side plate part G25) is painted as described above. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism G, the portion where the image is projected and the portion where the player can visually recognize the above-described silver base is coated with white ink. The louver plates G13, G14, and G15, the louver drive mechanism G2, the upper cover G9, and the rear screen G3 to be coated are molded (formed) with black resin.

[Structure of three-dimensional decoration]
Next, details of the three-dimensional decoration 400 shown in FIGS. 136 and 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156.
FIG. 152 is a perspective view of a three-dimensional decoration. FIG. 153 is an exploded view of the three-dimensional decoration. FIG. 154 is an exploded view of the light transmitting member. 155 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the LED and the crystal portion.
Note that although the three-dimensional decoration 400 and the three-dimensional decoration 500 are slightly different in appearance, the constituent members, structural features, and functions are the same. Therefore, only the three-dimensional decoration 400 will be described below, and the description of the three-dimensional decoration 500 is omitted. To do.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 152 and 153, the three-dimensional decoration 400 includes a base body 401, an LED substrate 402, a reflector 403, a light diffusion sheet 404, a light transmission member 405, and a cover portion 406.

  The base body 401 is a vertically long and substantially flat plate-like member, and the LED board 402 and the reflector 403 are screwed to the base body 401. A plurality of LEDs 410 are provided on the LED substrate 402. The LED substrate 402 covers the front surface of the base body 401.

  The reflector 403 is a vertically long and substantially flat member and covers the front surface of the LED substrate 402. The reflector 403 is provided with the same number of exposed holes 411 as the number of LEDs 410 that correspond to the LEDs 410 of the LED substrate 402 and expose the LEDs. The reflector 403 is plated, and the reflector 403 reflects the light of the LED 410 exposed from the exposure hole 411 forward. A plurality of fixing protrusions 412 are provided on the front surface of the reflector 403 so as to protrude forward and to fix the light diffusion sheet 404.

  The light diffusion sheet 404 includes a light diffusion sheet 404a and a light diffusion sheet 404b positioned below the light diffusion sheet 404a. The light diffusion sheets 404 a and 404 b are disposed in front of the reflector 403 and cover a part of the reflector 403. The light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are provided with a plurality of holes into which the fixed convex portions 412 of the reflector 403 are inserted. When the fixed convex portion 412 is inserted into the holes of the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b, the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are fixed to the reflector 403. The light diffusing sheets 404a and 404b are irradiated from the rear and dimm the light of the LED 410. In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with another light-diffusion member in the form used together with a light-diffusion sheet instead of a light-diffusion sheet. For example, a resin such as epoxy is sealed in the cavity of the LED chip to form a light diffusing part, a resin cap part is an LED package, a silicon rubber that is separate from the LED, It is good also as what diffuses light by arrange | positioning the light-diffusion cap of resin in the position which covers LED. Moreover, you may arrange | position the lens etc. which diffuse light as a light-diffusion member.

  The light transmission member 405 is a member that is disposed in front of the reflector 403 and the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b and is molded from a material that transmits light from the LED 410, for example, a light-transmitting colored plastic. The light transmitting member 405 is fixed to the reflector 403, the base body 401, and the cover portion 406 by a fixing convex portion 412 or a screw.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the light transmission member 405 is composed of a plurality of members. Each member has a portion that is three-dimensionally molded based on a concept relating to the decoration of the gaming machine. Specifically, the light transmitting member 405 includes a heel portion 420 having a three-dimensionally shaped portion with a moth motif, two crystal portions 421 and 422 having a three-dimensionally shaped portion with a crystal as a motif, And three rock portions 423, 424, and 425 having three-dimensionally shaped motifs.

  As shown in FIG. 153, a collar portion 420 is disposed at the center of the light transmitting member 405. A rock part 423 is disposed above one side of the collar part 420 (upper left of FIG. 153), and a crystal part 421 is disposed on one side of the rock part 423 (left side of FIG. 153). . Further, a rock portion 424 is disposed below one side of the collar portion 420 (lower left portion in FIG. 153). A crystal part 422 is disposed below the other side of the collar part 420 (lower right of FIG. 153), and a rock part 425 is disposed on the other side of the collar part 420 and the crystal part 422 (right side of FIG. 153). Has been placed. By configuring the light transmissive member 405 in this way, it is possible to give the player who sees this an impression that a ridge is stuck in a rocky place where crystals are exposed in some places.

  The three-dimensionally molded portions of the crystal parts 421 and 422 are in a form in which a plurality of prisms and pyramids are connected. As shown in FIGS. 153 and 155, the crystal part 421 faces the plurality of LEDs 410 via the light diffusion sheet 404a. As shown in FIG. 155, a predetermined space is formed between the light diffusion sheet 404a and the portion of the crystal portion 421 facing the light diffusion sheet 404 that is three-dimensionally molded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, in the crystal part 421, the part facing the LED 410 is a ridge line connecting the apex or the apex and the apex at the part where the crystal part 421 is three-dimensionally molded. Although not shown, the positional relationship between the crystal part 422 and the LED 410 is the same.

  An outer edge portion 426 having a predetermined width is formed at an end portion on one side of the light transmitting member 405 (left side in FIG. 153). The outer edge portion 426 is covered from the front by an inner edge portion 431 of a cover portion 406 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the cover portion 406 is a member formed in a vertically long frame shape having an opening at the center, and forms an outer frame of the three-dimensional decoration 400. An inner edge portion 431 that protrudes inside the opening is formed on one side frame 330 (the left side frame in FIG. 153) of the cover portion 406. As described above, the inner edge portion 431 covers the outer edge portion 426 of the light transmission member 405 from the front. The inner edge portion 431 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions so as not to interfere with a decorative portion of the light transmitting member 405, that is, a portion that is three-dimensionally formed in the shape of crystal, coral or rock.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the other side surface 432 of the cover portion 406 (the right side frame of FIG. 153) is covered from the front by the end portion of the light transmission member 405. That is, the inner edge portion 431 of one side frame 430 of the cover portion 406 covers one end portion of the light transmitting member 405 from the front, while the other side surface 432 of the cover portion 406 is formed of the light transmitting member 405. It is covered from the front by the other end.

[Direction]
Subsequently, a game effect mode in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. For the sake of brevity, only the differences from the first and second embodiments and effects related to the display unit 200 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, when receiving the start command, the sub CPU 102 operates from the time when the start command is received until the time when the winning action command is received, that is, the player operates the start lever 6 to perform each stop operation, and the combination of symbols. Is displayed, and an effect along the flow of a series of unit games that a profit according to the displayed combination of symbols is given is determined. The production consists of multiple parts. Each part corresponds to when a start command is received (when the start lever 6 is operated), each reel stop command (when the first, second and third stop operations are performed), and when a winning action command is received.

(Direction lottery table)
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, an effect lottery table used for determining the effect to be executed in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the effect state A. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the effect state B. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the effect state C. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the chance zone (CZ) and the effect state C. The data tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160 are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 (memory thereof).

  In the present embodiment, when receiving the start command, the sub CPU 102 selects and executes an effect lottery table to be referred to based on the above-described gaming state (such as the normal gaming state and the chance zone, see FIG. 36) and the rendering state. Determine the target production.

The effect state indicates the state of the display unit 200, and in the present embodiment, there are three effect states of effect state A, effect state B, and effect state C.
The effect state A indicates a state where the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position (see FIG. 139), that is, a state where an image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1. The effect state B shows a state where the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position (see FIG. 22), that is, a state where an image is projected onto the reel screen mechanism F1. The effect state C indicates a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position (see FIG. 20), and an image is projected onto the fixed screen mechanism G.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, 20 effects are defined in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment. In any production, three numbers are displayed on each screen, and these numbers are changed by operating the start lever 6, and the change of the numbers is terminated one by one according to each stop operation. The content that a combination of two numbers is displayed is common.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning combination may be determined when the winning combination is “other than BB” (that is, bonus: other than “F_BB1” or “F_BB2”). As the productions, there are “Production None_A”, “Production Flame_A”, “Production Ice_A”, “Production None_B”, “Production Flame_B”, “Production Ice_B”, and “Production None_C”. "For Production Flame_C", "For Production Ice_C" and "For Production Special_C" are defined. The contents of these “Production None_A” to “Production Special_C Only” are the combination of three numbers displayed after the third stop operation, a combination of numbers suggesting that the bonus is won, The form is common in that it is not “777”.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the winning combination is determined when the winning combination is “BB” (ie, bonus: “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”). As production, “Production None_777_A”, “Production Flame_777_A”, “Production Ice_777_A”, “Production None_777_B”, “Production Flame_777_B”, “Production Ice_777_B”, “Production None_777_C” “Production Flame_777_C”, “Production Ice_777_C” and “Production Special_777_C Dedicated” are defined. The contents of these “Production None_777_A” to “Production Special_777_C Only” are combinations of numbers “777” indicating that the combination of three numbers displayed after the third stop operation indicates that the bonus is won. It is common in that.

  “Fire” in the tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160 indicates that an image of flame is displayed on the background of the number to be displayed. “Ice” indicates that an image of ice is displayed on the background of the number to be displayed. “None” indicates that a black background image is displayed on the background of the number to be displayed. Further, “special” indicates that the numerical variation mode is a special mode different from other effects. The “special” effect mode will be described later.

  Further, “for A” in the tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160 indicates that the effect is for the effect state A, and “for B” indicates that the effect is for the effect state B. . “For C” indicates that the effect is for the effect state C. Note that, in the present embodiment, for example, the effects of “effect flame_777_A”, “effect flame_777_B”, and “effect flame_777_C” are displayed with a flame image in the background of the number to be displayed. The content of the effect that the combination of the three numbers displayed after the stop operation is “777” is common. However, as described above, the object to be projected is different depending on the illuminating device B depending on the effect state (front screen mechanism E1 in effect state A, reel screen mechanism F1 in effect state B, and fixed screen mechanism in effect state C). G) It is necessary to prepare effect data (image data to be projected) according to each screen mechanism. That is, different images (sets) corresponding to “production flame_777_A”, “production flame_777_B”, and “production flame_777_C” are prepared.

  The sub CPU 102 sequentially subtracts the effect lottery random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range, in this embodiment “0 to 255”, with the lottery value defined in each table, and the result of the subtraction is A lottery is performed by determining whether or not the value is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred).

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the production state A, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “200 for production non-A” and “for production flame_A” A lottery value of “16” is assigned to “40” and “production for ice_A”. In addition, when the winning combination is “BB”, a lottery value of “10” is assigned to “No effect for _777_A”, “20” to “For effect flame_777_A”, and “226” to “For effect ice_777_A”. .

  Therefore, when the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is used, effects other than the effects for effect state A, that is, effects for effect state B and effects for effect state C are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the production state B, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “200” for “no production_B”, “for production flame_B” A lottery value of “16” is assigned to “40” and “production for ice_B”. In addition, when the winning combination is “BB”, a lottery value of “5” is assigned to “For Production Nothing_777_B”, “30” to “For Production Flame_777_B”, and “221” to “For Production Ice_777_B”. .

  Therefore, when the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 158 is used, effects other than the effects for effect state B, that is, effects for effect state A and effects for effect state C are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in the effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the effect state C, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “200 for effect None_C”, “for effect Fire_C” A lottery value of “16” is assigned to “40” and “production for ice_C”. In addition, when the winning combination is “BB”, a lottery value of “15” is assigned to “For Production Nothing_777_C”, “20” for “Production Flame_777_C”, and “221” to “For Production Ice_777_C”. .

  Therefore, when the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 159 is used, effects other than effects for effect state C, that is, effects for effect state A and effects for effect state B are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the effect lottery table used in CZ and effect state C, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “16” for “no effect_C” and “for effect flame_C” “ A lottery value of “200” is assigned to “40” and “production for ice_C”. In addition, when the winning role is “BB”, “15” for “No production_777_C”, “20” for “Production flame_777_C”, “121” for “Production ice_777_C”, “For special production_777_C” A lottery value of “100” is allocated.

  Therefore, when the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 160 is used, effects other than the effects for effect state C, that is, effects for effect state A and effects for effect state B are not determined as effects to be executed.

  Also, the lottery value distribution is different from the effect lottery table used in the normal gaming state and the effect state C shown in FIG. For example, in the table shown in FIG. 159, a lottery value of “16” is assigned to “production for ice_C” of “other than BB”, but in the table shown in FIG. 160, a lottery value of “200” is assigned to the production. Is allocated. Therefore, the player displays ice on the background of the numbers, and the combination of the three numbers displayed after the third stop operation is not the number combination “777” indicating that the bonus is won. When the effect is executed, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the gaming state is CZ, that is, the user is staying in CZ that is relatively easily shifted to the ART gaming state.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in this Embodiment, in addition to the effect lottery table shown to FIGS. 157-160, the effect lottery table used at the time of CZ and effect state A, and CZ and effect state B An effect lottery table used sometimes is also provided. In addition, for each of the “normal ART” and “CT”, which are other game states shown in FIG. 36, an effect lottery table corresponding to each effect state is provided. In other words, in the present embodiment, there are as many effect lottery tables as the number of combinations of gaming state and effect state. In these effect lottery tables, lottery is performed so that an effect contradicting the staying effect state is not determined (for example, in the effect state C, the effect for the effect state A and the effect state B is not determined). The common point is that values are allocated. In addition, when the winning role is “other than BB”, “for production without 777_A”, “for production flame_777_A”, “for production ice_777_A”, “for production without _777_B”, “for production flame_777_B”, “for production ice_777_B” Lottery values are assigned so that “for use”, “no production for _777_C”, “for production flame_777_C”, “for production ice_777_C” and “for production special_777_C” are determined (that is, lottery is assigned to these productions). This is common in that “0” is assigned as a value).

(Production mode of “Production None_777_C”)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166, description will be given of an effect in a case where “no effect—for 777_C” is determined as an effect to be executed. FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows a state before the start command is received. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows the state after the start command is received. FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows a state after the first stop operation. FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows a state after the second stop operation. FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows a state after the third stop operation. FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining an effect in the effect state C, and shows a state after receiving a winning action command.

  As described above, there is a possibility that “there is no production_777_C” as the performance to be executed is when the production state is the production state C and the winning combination is “BB”. The effect state C is a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, and an image is projected onto the fixed screen mechanism G. As shown in FIG. 161, before the start command is received, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 constituting the louver screen G1 of the fixed screen mechanism G have a combination of three numbers as a result of the effect in the previous unit game. It is displayed.

  First, when the player operates the start lever 6 and the sub CPU 102 receives a start command, as shown in FIG. 162, a numerical value is displayed at each location where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 of the fixed screen mechanism G are arranged. Is projected (which may be referred to as a “fluctuating image” hereinafter) representing an aspect in which the image fluctuates. Further, the sub CPU 102 rotates the louver plates G13, G14, G15 in a predetermined direction, for example, counterclockwise when viewed from above. Since the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotating, the variation image is projected onto the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 and the rear screen G3.

  Next, when the player performs the first stop operation on the stop button 7L (that is, the reel 3L) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7L as shown in FIG. The rotation of the louver plate G13 to be stopped is stopped, and the numeral “7” is displayed on the louver plate G13. The sub CPU 102 sets the rotation stop position of the louver plate G13 to be the above-described front origin or back origin, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G13 is in the horizontal direction of the pachislot machine 1. The driving of the louver plate G13 is controlled so as to be parallel.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 continues to rotate the louver plate G14 and the louver plate G15, and also continues to display the variation image at each location where the louver plates G14 and G15 are arranged. In addition, when the effects from “No effect_for A” to “Only for effect special_C” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 assigns a number other than “7” to the louver board G13. Display the number.

  Next, when the player performs the second stop operation on the stop button 7C (that is, the reel 3C) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7C as shown in FIG. The rotation of the louver plate G14 to be stopped is stopped, and the numeral “7” is displayed on the louver plate G14. The sub CPU 102 sets the rotation stop position of the louver plate G14 to be the above-described front origin or back origin, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G14 is in the horizontal direction of the pachislot machine 1. The driving of the louver plate G14 is controlled so as to be parallel.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 continues the rotation of the louver plate G15, and also continues to display the variation image at the place where the louver plate G15 is disposed. Note that when the effects from “No effect_A” to “Special effect_C exclusive” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 assigns a number other than “7” to the louver board G14. Display the numbers

Next, when the player performs the third stop operation on the stop button 7R (that is, the reel 3R) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7R as shown in FIG. The rotation of the louver plate G15 is stopped, and the number “7” is displayed on the louver plate G15. The sub CPU 102 sets the rotation stop position of the louver plate G15 to be the above-described front origin or back origin, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G15 is in the horizontal direction of the pachislot machine 1. The driving of the louver plate G15 is controlled so as to be parallel. The louver plates G13, G14, G15 that have stopped rotating are flush and form a louver screen G1 having a plane parallel to the left-right direction of the pachislot machine 1.
In addition, when the effects from “No effect_for A” to “Only for effect special_C” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 assigns a number other than “7” to the louver board G15. Display the number.

  When the sub CPU 102 receives the winning action command, the sub CPU 102 superimposes the number combination “777” displayed on the louver boards G13, G14, and G15 and emphasizes the display, for example, as shown in FIG. So that the image of a shining star is displayed. The display area of the bright star image extends beyond the louver screen G1 including the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, and extends to the upper cover part G9 of the louver driving mechanism G2 and the frame part G23 of the rear screen G3. Note that the effect image such as the star image of the present embodiment may not protrude from the frame portion 23. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, when performing the effect of notifying that the right to shift to the advantageous gaming state is given, the three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500, the light emitting decoration part of the cabinet 61, the touch panel unit 200, the waist panel It is good also as a structure which pays more attention to the said effect by making other predetermined light emission parts and display parts, such as 25, light-extinguish and darken. In this case, the interest of a game can be raised more.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for starting the display of numbers on each of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 that have stopped rotating is set to the timing at which the rotation has completely stopped. This timing can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set before the rotation is completely stopped. For example, when the content of the detection signal output from the sensor G40 changes from the fact that the light receiving unit receives light from the light emitting unit to the case where it does not receive light (that is, the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the sensor 40G) May be set as the timing for starting the display of numbers.

  In the above description, the stop button 7L (or reel 3L) corresponds to the louver plate G13, the stop button 7C (or reel 3C) corresponds to the louver plate G14, and the stop button 7R (or reel 3R) corresponds to the louver plate. The aspect which matched G15 and stopped the corresponding louver board according to the stop operation with respect to each stop button (or reel) was demonstrated. However, the correspondence between the stop operation and the louver plate to be stopped can be arbitrarily set. For example, the louver plate G15 may be stopped during the first stop operation regardless of the target, the louver plate G14 may be stopped during the second stop operation, and the louver plate G13 may be stopped during the third stop operation.

  As a modification of the effect, an effect may be provided in which the operation of each louver plate is stopped based on the player operating a predetermined operation means such as the chance button 33 or the touch panel unit 201. In this case, one operation means may be operated a plurality of times, or a plurality of operation means may be used to accept operations. In addition, when performing a similar performance in a pachinko gaming machine, the operation of each louver is stopped based on the operation of so-called operation means for operation (buttons, levers, jog dial, switch, etc.) or the detection of the player's motion by an infrared sensor. Alternatively, the operation of each louver may be stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, in the demonstration production performed in the waiting state where the player is not playing the game, the above-mentioned production demonstration can be demonstrated and the novel production by the operation of the louver can be promoted to promote the operation of the gaming machine. . Also, in a gaming machine equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) capable of grasping the current date and time, when the time is a predetermined time or date, the occurrence frequency of the effect is changed, for example, by changing it. It is possible to promote operation on a specific day or time.

("Direction special _777_C only")
Next, with reference to FIG. 167 to FIG. 171, an “effect special_777_C-only” effect mode will be described as an example of the “special” effect mode. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the “special” effect mode, in which (a) is a top view and (b) is a front view of the louver plate at the origin. FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining a “special” effect mode, in which (a) is a top view and (b) is a diagram as viewed from diagonally above the louver plate rotated 45 degrees from the origin. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining a “special” effect mode, in which (a) is a top view and (b) is a front view of a louver plate rotated 90 degrees from the origin. FIGS. 170A and 170B are diagrams for explaining a “special” effect mode. FIG. 170A is a top view of the louver plate rotated 135 degrees from the origin, and FIG. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining a “special” effect mode, in which (a) is a top view and (b) is a front view of a louver plate rotated 180 degrees from the origin. In FIGS. 167 to 171, only one louver plate is shown, and the other louver plates are not shown. The white arrow indicates the range where the projected image can be seen. Further, in the top view, the shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side.

  There is a possibility that “production special_777_C exclusive” may be determined as the performance to be executed when the production state is the production state C and the winning combination is “BB”. When this effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 167, the sub CPU 102 has a louver at the origin (front origin or back origin), that is, at a position where the image projection plane is parallel to the horizontal direction of the pachislot machine 1. The number “7” is projected onto the plates G13, G14, and G15. If the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are not at the front origin or the back origin at the start of production, the number “7” is projected after moving to the front origin or the back origin.

  As shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, the sub CPU 102 changes the image to be projected in accordance with the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. Specifically, 180 images (contents of rotating a virtual board with “7” written on one side 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from a state perpendicular to the horizontal direction of the pachislot machine 1 ( The image rotated by 1 degree) is stored in the memory of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in advance. Each image is associated with the rotational position of the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. Then, at the time of production, the sub CPU 102 reads out and displays an image corresponding to the rotational positions of the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 from the memory. Specifically, the projection image data read from the memory and processed by the sub CPU 102 and the rendering processor 104 is stored in the VRAM 105 functioning as a frame buffer, and then output from the projector mechanism B2 to display the image. Is going.

  By repeating this, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image of the number “7” is rotating. In addition, it is preferable to display an image so that the rotation axis of a virtual board and the rotation axis of louver board G13, G14, G15 may correspond. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, when the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are orthogonal to the left-right direction, the side portions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are narrow. Even if the image of the number “7” is projected onto the area, it is difficult for the player to recognize the image of the number “7”, and therefore the image of the number “7” is not projected. However, since the time when the image of the number “7” is not projected is momentary, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Here, in the effect of rotating the louver plates G13, G14, G15, a predetermined effect image, background image, or the like may be displayed in addition to the number “7” image in order to enhance the realistic feeling of the rotation operation. . For example, it is possible to enhance the presence of the rotation effect by projecting an image in which light runs in the direction of rotation, swirls occur in the water, or a character that looks like figure skating spins. In addition to the rotational operation of the louver plate, the effect of the production is enhanced by projecting a predetermined image related to the operation mode onto the movable combination in accordance with the operation mode of other movable combinations. Can do. It should be noted that the above-described effect image and background image are displayed on any or all of the side surfaces of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 and the rear screen G3 during the time when the number “7” image is not projected. It may be a thing. Furthermore, an image dedicated to orthogonal timing may be provided. That is, while the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are at an angle that can be said to be orthogonal or substantially orthogonal, a predetermined image for the side surface is projected during a period in which the side surface portion of the louver plate is easily visible to the player. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation. For example, by projecting a color that suggests or informs the degree of expectation, such as blue, green, red, etc. on the side surface of the louver board, even if the projected image is in an orthogonal position where it is difficult to visually recognize, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation is performed Can do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts, and the sub CPU 102 sets the number “7” at the start of the production shown in FIG. The projected side surface is treated as the first surface G21a during the subsequent production, and the opposite surface is treated as the second surface G21b. Instead of this, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b may be formed so as to be distinguishable (for example, one of them is colored), and various controls in the production may be performed as an absolute concept.

  Also, instead of storing the above-mentioned 180 images in the memory, the contents of rotating a virtual board with the number “7” written on both sides counterclockwise when viewed from above is 360 degrees. These 360 images may be stored in the memory in advance in association with the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. In this case, the sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 from the memory and displays it when performing the effect.

  Moreover, in the said production | presentation, you may display together the image which decorates a number around the number displayed on louver board G13, G14, G15. For example, an image of ice or flame may be displayed around the numbers. Moreover, you may display the image used as a background on the upper cover part G9 of the louver drive mechanism G2 and the frame part G23 of the back screen G3 during the said performance execution. Moreover, you may display an image inside the back screen G3 which a player can visually recognize by rotating louver board G13, G14, G15. It should be noted that the image that decorates the numbers and the image that is displayed inside the rear screen G3 changes in accordance with the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, and is an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. It is desirable to prepare in advance.

  In the above example, the example in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above has been described. However, instead of this, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 may be rotated clockwise as viewed from above. In this case, an image corresponding to the rotation direction is prepared as an image stored in the memory in advance. In addition, when both the image corresponding to the clockwise direction and the image corresponding to the counterclockwise direction are prepared and the aspect of the effect is lottery, the rotation direction is determined by lottery, and the image corresponding to the determined rotation direction May be displayed. Further, the degree of expectation may be changed depending on the rotation direction and the rotation speed. Furthermore, it is also possible to make a temporary stop or temporary stop in the middle, or to reverse the rotation direction.

(Mode of transition of production state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 172 to FIG. 175, the transition state of the production state will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the effect state can be changed within the lock time. FIG. 173 shows an effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state A. FIG. 174 shows an effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state B. FIG. 175 shows an effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state C.

  In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in CZ1 and CZ2. The difference between this embodiment and the first and second embodiments is that the type of lock to be generated has a type. Also, instead of changing the effect state according to the game state (switching the screen for displaying the image), the effect state transition lottery is performed when the lock is generated, and the effect state is changed according to the lottery result. It is a point to make.

  In this embodiment, the types of lock include “LO short lock”, “LO long lock”, “short lock after full stop”, and “long lock after full stop”. The “LO short lock” is a lock that is triggered by the operation of the start lever 6 and delays the start of reel rotation for a predetermined time A. The “LO length lock” is a lock that is triggered by the operation of the start lever 6 and delays the start of reel rotation for a predetermined time B longer than the predetermined time A.

  The “short lock after all stops” is a lock that occurs after the third stop operation and invalidates the input operation for the next unit game for a predetermined time A. The “long lock after all stops” is a lock that occurs after the third stop operation and invalidates the insertion operation for the next unit game for a predetermined time B longer than the predetermined time A.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the lock as a result of the lock lottery, the main control board 71 further determines the lock type by lottery. As the lottery method for the lock type, a known lottery method can be appropriately employed. For example, a lottery value is assigned to each lock type in advance, and a lottery value assigned to each lock type is sequentially subtracted with a random number for lottery acquired at the time of lottery, depending on whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative The lottery result may be determined. Then, the main control board 71 transmits a command including information on the lock type determined as a result of lottery to the sub-control board 42.

  When the command is received, the sub CPU 102 performs effect state transition lottery using an effect state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 173 to 175) corresponding to the effect state in which the user stays. “None” in FIGS. 173 to 175 means that the effect state is not changed. In FIG. 173, “A → B” means transition from the production state A to the production state B, and “A → C” means transition from the production state A to the production state C. In FIG. 174, “B → A” means that the effect state B is changed to the effect state A, and “B → C” means that the effect state B is changed to the effect state C. In FIG. 175, “C → A” means a transition from the production state C to the production state A, and “C → B” means a transition from the production state C to the production state B.

  At the time of effect lottery lottery, the sub CPU 102 first selects an effect state transition lottery table corresponding to the effect state to stay. Also, a random number value for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 255” is acquired. Then, the lottery value for lottery acquired for each lock mode indicated by the command received from the main control board 71 in the selected table for each transition state of the effect state (the above-mentioned “none”, “A → B”, etc.). A lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting with a specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Determined as lottery results).

  Here, in the transition from the production state A to the production state C, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front exposure position to the front standby position. In the transition from the production state B to the production state C, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position.

  In the transition from the production state C to the production state A, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In the transition from the production state C to the production state B, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position.

  On the other hand, in the transition from the production state A to the production state B, it is necessary to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position and move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. There is. If these movements are performed simultaneously, the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 come into contact during the movement, and the movement cannot be completed. For this reason, it is necessary to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position after moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position.

  In the transition from the production state B to the production state A, it is necessary to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position and to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. is there. If these movements are performed simultaneously, the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 come into contact with each other during the movement. For this reason, it is necessary to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position after moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position.

  Therefore, the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the output state B to the production state A are longer than the time required for the above-described other transition modes (that is, transitions involving the production state C). Cost.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined time B related to the “LO length lock” and “long lock after all stops” described above is the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the outgoing state B to the production state A. It is set to be more than the time required for. Further, the predetermined time A related to “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stops” is shorter than the time required for the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the outgoing state B to the production state A, Moreover, the time required for the transition from the production state A or the production state B to the production state C and the time required for the transition from the production state C to the production state A or the production state B are set.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 172, the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the output state B to the production state A within the time of “short lock”, that is, “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stops”. This transition is not possible.

  Therefore, in the effect state transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 173 to 175, the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B and the effect state A to the effect state A when “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stops” occur. The lottery value is assigned so that the transition to is not won.

  Specifically, in the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state A shown in FIG. 173, “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition state “none” for “LO short lock”, and the transition state “ “0” is defined as the lottery value of “A → B”, and “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “A → C”. For “short lock after all stops”, “200” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “none”, “0” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “A → B”, and the transition mode “ “56” is defined as the lottery value of “A → C”.

  That is, when “LO short lock” and “short lock after full stop” occur in the production state A, the transition from the production state A to the production state B is not determined as a transition mode. In FIG. 173, for “LO length lock” and “long lock after all stops”, one or more lottery values are assigned for various transition modes.

  In the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state B shown in FIG. 174, “128” is defined as the lottery value for the transition mode “none” for “LO short lock”, and the transition mode “B → A”. "0" is defined as the lottery value of "", and "128" is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode "B → C". For “short lock after all stops”, “200” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “none”, “0” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “B → A”, and the transition mode “ “56” is defined as the lottery value of “B → C”.

  That is, when “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stops” occur in the production state B, the transition from the production state B to the production state A is not determined as the transition mode. In FIG. 174, for “LO length lock” and “long lock after all stops”, one or more lottery values are assigned for various transition modes.

  In the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state C shown in FIG. 175, one or more lottery values are assigned for various transition modes in each lock type.

  As described above, in the effect state transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 173 to 175, when “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stops” occur, the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B and the effect state B The transition to the production state A is not won. For this reason, although the lock is released, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the transition of the effect state is not completed and the start timing of the effect in the transitioned effect state is delayed. In addition, in the period when the stop operation of the stop buttons 7A, 7B, 7C for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is impossible, the stop operation is performed by completing the operation of the movable accessory such as the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible to prevent the player from concentrating on his / her concentration due to an effect using a movable accessory having a large visual impact. In addition, when a movable accessory that affects the visibility of the display unit such as the front screen mechanism E1 operates at a timing at which it can be stopped, the appearance of the navigation in the operation mode (see FIGS. 116 and 117) changes unexpectedly. Since it becomes difficult to recognize, there is a possibility that the operation may be mistaken. Therefore, there is an effect that such an erroneous operation can be suppressed by completing the operation of the movable accessory while being locked.

  If the occurrence of the lock is associated with the winning combination, the sub CPU 102 may determine the lock type by looking at the command including the information on the winning combination. Also, the lock type may be simplified so that only the lock time is different. In this case, the main control board 71 transmits a command including only the lock time information, and the sub CPU 102 determines the type of lock based on the lock time information included in the command. In addition, while the lock is generated, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R perform reel action effects such as reverse rotation, rotation within a predetermined range, one or more pauses, low-speed rotation, high-speed rotation, etc. Suggestions, notifications of advantageous gaming status, and the like may be performed, and the entertainment of the game may be enhanced by performing an effect of operating a movable accessory such as the front screen mechanism E1 in a manner linked to the reel action effect.

(First modification)
Subsequently, a first modification will be described with reference to FIG. The first modified example relates to an effect using the louver screen G1.
FIG. 176 is a view for explaining a modification example of the effect using the louver screen, (a) is a front view of the louver plate at the origin, and (b) the front of the louver plate rotated 45 degrees from the origin. It is a figure, (c) It is a front view of the louver board rotated 90 degrees from the origin, (d) is a front view of the louver board rotated 135 degrees from the origin, (e) is rotated 180 degrees from the origin It is a front view of the done louver board. In FIG. 176, only one louver plate is shown, and the other louver plates are not shown. A shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side. Also in this modification, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts.

  In the description of the above-described “production special_777_C-only” production mode, the mode of displaying the image of the number “7” that changes according to the rotation on the rotating louver plates G13, G14, and G15 has been described. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 176, an image “◯” is displayed on the first surface G21a which is one surface, and an image “×” is displayed on the second surface G21b which is the other surface. May be adopted, and an effect mode may be adopted in which the images of “o” and “x” are displayed on the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 while being changed according to the rotation.

  In this case, 360 images with the content of rotating 360 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above the virtual board with “O” written on one side and “X” on the other side are displayed. The louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are stored in advance in the memory of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in association with the rotational positions. Then, when the effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (e), the sub CPU 102 reads out and displays an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 from the memory.

(Second modification)
Subsequently, a second modification will be described with reference to FIG. The second modified example relates to an effect using the louver screen G1.
FIG. 177 is a view for explaining a second modification of the effect using the louver screen, (a) is a front view and a top view of the louver screen and the rear screen at the origin, and (b) the origin. (C) is a front view and a top view of the louver screen and the rear screen rotated 180 degrees from the origin. In FIG. 177, only one louver plate is shown, and the other louver plates are not shown. In FIG. 177, the rear screen G3 is shown in a simplified manner. A shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side. Also in this modification, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts.

  In the description of the above-described “production special_777_C-only” production mode, the mode of displaying the image of the number “7” that changes according to the rotation on the rotating louver plates G13, G14, and G15 has been described. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 177, an image including the characters “◯” and “around” is displayed on the first surface G21a which is one surface, and the second surface which is the other surface. G21b displays an image including the characters “?” And “chance”, and displays an image including the characters “o” and “around”, and an image including the characters “?” And “chance”. You may employ | adopt the production | generation aspect which changes according to rotation to board G13, G14, G15.

  In this case, a virtual board with “○” and “around” on one side and “?” And “chance” on the other side is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. The 360 images of the contents to be processed are stored in advance in the memory of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in association with the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. Then, when the effect is executed, the sub CPU 102 reads out and displays an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 from the memory.

  In this effect, the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 rotate to display an image including the characters “×” and “Zanen” on the inner side of the rear screen G3 that is visible to the player. It should be noted that the image including the characters “×” and “Zanen” displayed inside the rear screen G3 is stored in the memory of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 so that the appearance changes according to the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. In addition, images corresponding to the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are prepared in advance. For example, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are at a rotational position rotated 45 degrees from the origin, the area inside the rear screen G3 that is visible to the player is narrower than the mode shown in FIG. 177 (b). ing. Therefore, an image including the characters “×” and “Zanen” that can be displayed in the inner area of the narrowed rear screen G3 (the “Z” and “Zanen” in the outer end of “X” and “Zanen”). Prepare an image that includes the characters “N”. In FIG. 177 (b), an image is not projected on the side portions of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. Here, the image of the portion where the center line of “X” crosses is shown on the side portion. The display of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and the display of the rear screen G3 may be combined to display “x”. In this manner, the player can display predetermined identification information recognizable by the first image projected on the louver boards G13, G14, and G15 and the second image projected on the rear screen G3. Variations in display effects can be increased.

(Third Modification)
Subsequently, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. The third modification relates to the effects of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.
178A is a side view of the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the first movement position, and FIG. 178B is a front view of the front screen mechanism E1. 179A is a side view of the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the second movement position, and FIG. 179B is a front view of the front screen mechanism E1. 180A is a side view of the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the screen exposure position, and FIG. 180B is a front view of the front screen mechanism E1. FIG. 181 shows another example of an image displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. In FIGS. 178 to 180, the display unit 200 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  In the above-described example, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are determined by the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, and the front exposure position (see FIGS. 21 and 139) and the reel exposure position (see FIG. 22). ), An image projected from the irradiation light device B is displayed. However, in this modification, the front screen mechanism E1 starts moving from the front standby position to the front exposure position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 starts to display images on the reel standby position from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. This is different from the above example. Note that, in the feature that the display of an image is started during movement, the case where the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 and the case where the image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 are different except that the display target of the image is different. It is the same. Therefore, in the following, a case where an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 will be described, and a description on a case where an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 will be omitted.

  In this modification, when the above-described effect state B, that is, the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position (see FIG. 22), the sub CPU 102 changes the effect state to the effect state A. When the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 starts moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position.

  Further, in the above-described effect state C, that is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position and the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position (see FIG. 20), the sub CPU 102 changes the effect state to the effect state A. When the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position is started.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), when the front screen mechanism E1 reaches the preset first movement position, the sub CPU 102 projects an image on the moving front screen mechanism E1 onto the irradiation light device B. To start. That is, the moving front screen mechanism E1 starts displaying an image. The first movement position can be set to an arbitrary position.

  In this modification, the image displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 is an image made up of characters “CHANCE” and an elliptical effect image, as shown in FIG. 178 (b). The sub CPU 102 displays an image in a range visible to the player in the front screen mechanism E1.

  The range in which the player can visually recognize the front screen mechanism E1 changes so as to gradually expand as the front screen mechanism E1 approaches the front exposure position. The sub CPU 102 changes the size and position of the image to be displayed in accordance with the change in the range that the player can visually recognize. On the ROM cartridge substrate 76, an image having a size corresponding to a moving angle or a speed estimated from the control data of the motor that controls the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 79 is prepared and stored in advance. The sub CPU 102 reads out and displays an image corresponding to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 (that is, a range visible to the player) from the stored image. The projection position of the image is controlled so as to project onto the virtual viewable area when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved by the control data of the motor. The projection position is defined by the projection position data. A virtual viewable area corresponding to the operation sequence may be stored in advance in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 as projection position data, and the projection position data corresponding to the operation sequence of the accessory to be executed may be called up. Further, the sub CPU 102 may calculate the projection position data by performing a real-time operation of moving the projection target model in accordance with the operation sequence in the virtual space on the drawing process.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the second movement position closer to the front exposure position than the first movement position, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the front screen The mechanism E1 displays an image having the same vertical size as the image displayed at the first movement position (see FIG. 178 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the front screen mechanism E1 has a first movement position and a second movement position. Although the content is the same as the image displayed in (see FIGS. 178 (b) and 179 (b)), an image having a large vertical size is displayed.

  Here, when an image is not displayed on the moving front screen mechanism E1 as in the present modification, the white front screen mechanism E1 comes down to the front exposure position as it is. For this reason, the functional ruggedness of an accessory modeling becomes conspicuous. Further, the player may be given the impression that the presentation is awaited until the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is completed, that is, the impression that the presentation is extended. As a result, the tempo of the performance is deteriorated, and there are cases where the interest of the game is offended.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, since the projection onto the movable accessory starts in the middle of the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 (movable accessory), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, the image projected during movement changes so as to increase as the range that the player can visually recognize increases in accordance with the movement of the movable accessory. For this reason, a powerful effect in which the movement of the movable accessory and the change in the image are combined can be executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), in the front screen mechanism E1 in the first movement position, since the tilt angle toward the back is large, it is difficult to focus and it is difficult to display the entire image to be displayed clearly. . However, if the image can be displayed to such an extent that the player can grasp the content of the displayed image, there is no problem in terms of production even if the image is slightly out of focus. In addition, taking such a situation in reverse, an effect may be performed in which the image is unclearly displayed at the first movement position, and the image is displayed more clearly as the front exposure position is approached from the first movement position.

  Further, after the front screen mechanism E1 arrives at the front exposure position, that is, after the state shown in FIG. 180 is reached, the image to be displayed may be further changed. Further, while maintaining the size of the image displayed at the first movement position, an image with the same content may be displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 during the subsequent movement and at the front exposure position.

  Further, instead of the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b), the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c) may be displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 at the corresponding positions. The effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c) are effects that suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than the above-described effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b). Yes. In this effect, at the first movement position (see FIG. 178 (a)), the characters “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 181 (a) and the elliptical effect image are the same as the image shown in FIG. 178 (b). Is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. In addition, in the second movement position (see FIG. 179 (a)), in addition to the characters “CHANCE” and the elliptical effect image shown in FIG. 181 (b), a part of the characters “SUPER” and the lightning effect An image consisting of a part of the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1.

  At the front exposure position (FIG. 180 (a)), an image composed of the characters “SUPER” and the lightning effect shown in FIG. 181 (c), and the characters “CHANCE” and the elliptical effect image are displayed. Is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. Note that the image to be displayed may be further changed from this state.

  By preparing both the effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b) and the effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c), the player can move to the first movement position. 178 (b) and 181 (a), the image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is finally displayed or the image shown in FIG. 181 (c) is not known. . For this reason, the player pays attention to the subsequent change in the effect, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. That is, in the effect that changes according to the movement of the movable accessory (front screen mechanism E1), the same display is made at the first movement position, but after that, it is possible to generate a plurality of effect patterns. Can be increased.

Note that the first movement position at which image display is started can be any timing from the start of movement of the front screen mechanism E1 to the completion of movement according to the content of the effect.
Further, the operation pattern is not limited to the effect of moving in the order of the front standby position, the first movement position, the second movement position, and the front exposure position. For example, after moving from the front standby position to an arbitrary movement position, once returning to the front standby position, reciprocating between a plurality of movement positions, temporarily stopping once or a plurality of times at the movement position, It is possible to use an operation pattern that vibrates at the position, or any operation pattern that can be controlled by a drive source such as a motor.

  Further, the position where the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is stopped is not limited to the front exposure position, and can be set to an arbitrary position. In this case, image display is started at an arbitrary timing during the operation pattern without waiting for the completion of movement (displacement) from the movement start point to the arbitrarily set stop position.

  In addition, the front screen mechanism E1 may be operated based on the operation status of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R or the presentation operation means (chance button 33), or image display may be started. For example, when one of the stop buttons is operated for the first time (at the time of the first stop operation), the image is displayed when the effect operation means is operated until the front screen mechanism E1 starts moving and stops moving. It may be an effect that the display of the image is started, or when the effect operation means is not operated, the image may not be displayed.

  Further, the projection target, that is, the target for displaying an image is not limited to a screen shape such as the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and may be any movable accessory. For example, it can be a movable accessory having a shape imitating a predetermined character or motif. Furthermore, the number of movable accessories is not limited to one. When a plurality of movable accessories are provided, an image may be displayed on all or a part of them, or an image may be displayed across the movable accessory and the fixed member. May be. For example, when there are a fixed member and a movable accessory as an object to display an image, the characters “CHANCE” are displayed on the fixed member first, and then the movable accessory is moved, at any timing during the movement. By displaying the characters “SUPER” and moving the movable accessory, an effect that allows the player to recognize the characters “SUPER” and “CHANCE” by combining the display of the fixed member and the movable accessory. It can be carried out. Thereby, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the control of the projection image, the projection sequence is determined based on the sequence number of the accessory shown in FIG. Here, when it is grasped that the movable accessory fails and does not move according to the detection status of the front exposure position sensor E15b, the front standby position sensor E15a, etc., an insurance image simulating the movable accessory on the projectable region May be projected together with the effect image. By providing insurance production that enables the player to understand what kind of moveable mover's movement is involved, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped due to a failure of the moveable moveable product, thus reducing the decline in operation. it can.

  Further, the effect content using the projected image and the movable accessory is not limited to the above-described effect example, and can be any predetermined display. For example, suggestion of gaming status, suggestion / notification of the expected state of benefits such as ART and bonus, suggestion of winning role, background image not simply related to expectation, or premium image that can be seen only when certain conditions are met Alternatively, a two-dimensional code that can be read by the camera of the mobile terminal may be projected. It is not limited to characters and effects, and may be a still image of a character or an animation with movement.

  Further, in the present modification, an effect when the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front standby position to the front exposure position has been described, but when returning from the front exposure position to the front standby position, the image is displayed at an arbitrary timing during movement. It is good also as an effect which starts a display. In this case, since the image is displayed while the visibility of the front screen mechanism E1 (movable accessory) that is a projection target is lowered from the player, an image that is desired to be displayed for a moment or the next projection target is suggested. An image may be displayed.

  In this case, for example, after defeating the battle screen in the state where the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position, an image suggesting resurgence may be displayed while moving until the front screen mechanism E1 returns to the front standby position. . Then, after the front screen mechanism E1 returns to the front standby position, it is possible to perform an effect of performing a revival victory effect.

  Moreover, it is good also as what displays the image | video etc. of a connection until it switches to the next projection object. For example, as the stage shifts from the rural stage (first stage) where the movable accessory is produced at the exposure position to the city stage (second stage) where the movable accessory is produced at the standby position, it is movable. When moving an actor from the exposure position to the standby position, projecting a video of the moving means toward the city, such as a train or airplane, on the moving movable accessory can depict the world of the work more deeply, making the game more interesting There is an effect to increase. The front screen mechanism E1 (first movable accessory) is returned from the front exposure position to the front standby position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 (second movable accessory) is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. Even in the movement for switching the movable accessory to be performed, by performing projection during any or all of the movements, it is possible to suppress an extended feeling of effect that is awaited by the switching.

  When performing projection effects using movable objects in pachinko gaming machines (including enclosed gaming machines in which game balls are enclosed, and managed gaming machines that can be managed using a management frame common to multiple manufacturers) Suggestion or notification of a specific gaming state such as big hit or small hit, suggesting a shift to a special gaming state such as a high base state due to so-called electric support or a small hit rush state where small hits occur frequently An image for notification may be projected. In addition, even if a so-called hold image is projected and displayed on a movable accessory, the pre-read hold change or the hold change of the change suggests the expected degree of the hold before the change of the hold starts or during the change. Good. Further, in these cases, an effect that can be executed within the effectable time during the change may be determined based on the information of the variable display pattern that sets the change time of the special figure.

  In addition, when the invention according to the present modification is employed in a pachinko gaming machine, a pseudo game ball may be displayed in a movable game object or a rolling area of the game ball in a projected image. In the conventional pachinko game machine, the actual game ball has a rolling area limited by a game nail or center frame. Since the projected image can be displayed on the screen, it is possible to entertain the effects peculiar to the projector. For example, by using a movable accessory that reproduces an old honeymoon machine that can not be installed under the current rules (a pachinko machine that wins a big prize in a specific area), using a simulated sphere instead of an actual game ball, It is good also as what performs the reproduction which reproduced the game nature of former times.

  Further, the contents shown in the third modification may be employed in the pachislot machine in the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

(Other variations)
In each example (including modification) of the above-described effects, an example in which three louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are used has been described. However, one or two of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are used. Then, the above-mentioned effects may be performed. For example, the left and right louver plates G13 and G15 may stop rotating at the origin position, and only the central louver plate G14 may be rotated.

  Further, for example, at the position where the louver plate G14 is rotated 90 degrees from the origin, different small roles are suggested in the left region and the right region across the louver plate G14 of the rear screen G3 that can be viewed by the player. An image (one of which is an image suggesting a small winning combination in the unit game) is displayed, and after the third stop operation, the louver board G14 is finally stopped at the origin position, and the louver board G14 at the origin position is displayed. In addition, only the image of the winning small role may be displayed.

  Further, with the projection of the image onto the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, the above-described backlash operation may be performed at an arbitrary timing such as when the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 is started or stopped.

  Up to now, basically the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are used as the display part and the numerical symbols and XX? Although the effect which displays the identification information regarding games, such as these was demonstrated, the effect which uses a louver board as a shielding part which uses the back screen G3 as a basic display part and shields the display of the back screen G3 may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the louver plate is once rotated to an orthogonal position, and unlike the case of FIG. 177 (b), “o” and “hit” that mean hit are projected onto the rear screen G3. Next, the louver plate is rotated, and at the timing when the louver is at a rotational position where the rear screen G3 is visible, “◯” and “hit” are projected on the rear screen G3. When the louver plate stops at a shielding position that shields the rear screen G3 such as parallel, it is lost, and the louver plate stops at a non-shielding position where the rear screen G3 can be visually recognized such as an orthogonal position. When “around” becomes visible, a series of effects such as “around” can be performed. As described above, when the louver plate is used as the shielding portion, an image is not particularly projected on the louver plate, but the louver plate shields the rear screen G3 such as an image using a wall or a shutter as a motif. An image that is easy to understand can be projected. It is good also as both the production | presentation which uses the role of a louver board as a display part, and the production | generation used as a shielding part, and may perform only one production | presentation. In the above-described example, “O” and “Hit” are displayed on the rear screen G3. However, as long as the identification information is related to the game, any suggestion or notification of the game state, suggestion or notification of the internal winning combination, etc. Things may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the substantially rectangular flat louver plates G13, G14, and G15 have been described. However, the shape of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a circular or semicircular louver plate may be employed.
Moreover, you may widen the clearance gap between each louver board. Then, a vertically long plate-like member extending downward from the upper frame portion G29 may be interposed in the widened gap. In this case, the vertically long flat plate member interposed between the louver plates functions as a fixed screen.

Further, instead of the side plate portion G25 of the rear screen G3, a side plate portion having a linear cross section, that is, a side plate portion that is not curved may be provided.
Further, the installation of the rear screen G3 may be omitted. In this case, the color of the inner wall of the screen casing C10 behind the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 may be black so that the projected image is not displayed (is not easily displayed).

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the motor G31 is provided in each of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 and each can operate independently has been described. However, a plurality of louver plates are operated by one motor. It may be.
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be rotated 360 degrees or more clockwise or counterclockwise, but the rotation angle may be limited. In this case, a part of one louver plate may be overlapped with a part of another louver plate so as to be in a blind shape.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the example in which the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachislot machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. Parrot gaming machine that is a slot machine to be used, pachinko gaming machine that uses game balls, encapsulated gaming machine that encloses gaming media and adds gaming value with electronic data, and can be used and managed by multiple manufacturers in common The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a gaming machine called a management gaming machine in which a management frame is used and a gaming board (so-called pachinko machine panel) can be mounted on the management frame.

[Operational effects of the third embodiment]
(First effect)
In the display unit 200 in the present embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 139), the reel screen mechanism F1 (FIGS. 22 and 139), the louver screen G1 (louver plates G13, G14, G15) in the fixed screen mechanism G, In addition, images can be projected on the four screens of the rear screen G3 when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated.
Therefore, it is possible to provide various effects using these screens and improve the interest of the game.

(Second effect)
The effect of the rear screen G3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the present embodiment, and shows a mode in which an image is displayed on the rear screen. In FIG. 182, the rotating louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are not shown.

  The rear screen G3 includes a rear plate portion G24 that is curved with a predetermined curvature, and a curved portion G22 including a side plate portion G25 that is continuous with both ends thereof. The side plate portion G25 is curved with a predetermined curvature. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182, when the background image of the flame is displayed on the rear screen G3 when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated, the side plate portion that is not curved and has a straight section is formed. Compared with the case of having, the distortion of the image of the boundary of the back board part G24 and the side board part G25 is not conspicuous. For this reason, it is possible to display a continuous image across the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25 without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

(Third effect)
As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, a stepping motor G31 is disposed behind the rear screen G3. The rear of the rear screen G3 is a place that cannot be seen by the player, and is suitable for arranging a motor and wiring (harness). By disposing the stepping motor G31 behind the rear screen G3, it is possible to secure an arrangement place for a reel unit, other substrates, a power supply box, and the like below the display unit 200. Thus, by providing a space in which a predetermined member can be placed in a non-projection area where the projection light is shielded, such as behind the projection object, and an area where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the degree of freedom in designing the member arrangement of the gaming machine Can be increased. In addition, as long as the projection light is shielded and the region is visible to the player, a predetermined position such as a side may be used as the member arrangement space, not limited to the rear of the projection target.

(Fourth effect)
151, that is, in the fixed screen mechanism G, where the image is projected and where the player can visually recognize, the above-described silver base is coated with white ink. . By painting in this way, the reflection efficiency of the painted part increases, and the color of the projected image becomes vivid. Further, the appearance of the fixed screen mechanism G itself for the player is improved.

  The louver plates G13, G14, and G15, the louver drive mechanism G2, the upper cover G9, and the rear screen G3 to be coated are molded (formed) with black resin. For this reason, in the above-described painting operation, it becomes easy to find a place where forgetting to paint or a place with uneven coating. As a result, it is possible to appropriately deal with coating omission and coating unevenness. Moreover, since the place where the above-mentioned coating is not performed remains black, it can be made to function as a light stop, and it becomes unnecessary to provide the member which shields light separately. In addition, by molding a modeled object to be painted with a color different from the painted color such as black resin, it becomes easy to find unpainted or uneven coating at the time of painting, and the efficiency of painting work can be improved. In addition, if the paint is partly peeled off over time due to the influence of the movement mode of the movable accessory such as the rotation of the louver plate, it will stand out if the black color is exposed in the white paint. This also has the effect of facilitating maintenance confirmation work. The same applies to a case where a molded article is molded using a resin of another color having a high light shielding property such as dark blue or dark gray instead of a complete black color.

(Fifth effect)
The sub CPU 102 detects the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 using the two protrusions G41 (see FIGS. 145 and 146) in the louver drive gear G33 and the sensor G40 that detects the protrusion G41. Control the rotation. Therefore, the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 can be detected more accurately than in the case where the rotation control is performed using one protrusion, and the rotational control of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 is performed. This can be done with higher accuracy.

  Further, when one protrusion G41 of the louver drive gear G33 is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the sensor G40 (that is, when the sensor G40 detects the protrusion G41), the louver plates G13, G14, G15. However, it is parallel to the left-right direction of the pachislot machine 1 (that is, parallel to the player). For this reason, the louver boards G13, G14, and G15 can be accurately positioned in parallel with the player, and the image projected from the irradiation light device B can be appropriately displayed.

(Sixth effect)
As shown in FIG. 155, a predetermined space is formed between the light diffusion sheet 404a and the portion of the crystal portion 421 facing the light diffusion sheet 404 that is three-dimensionally molded. This improves the appearance when the crystal part 421 is irradiated with light adjusted by the light diffusion sheet 404a. In addition, since it becomes difficult to grasp the shape of the LED 410 from the light transmitted from the crystal portion 421, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity (so-called collapse of the LED) that is felt when light is emitted from a plurality of LEDs. Further, not only when there is a light diffusing sheet, but even when no diffusing sheet is provided, from the player's viewpoint, the vertex or ridge line of the crystal portion 421 is positioned in front of the LED 410, so that the position of the LED is the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the design from being deteriorated as compared with the case where the LED is fully visible or the position is easily known. In addition, although an Example is the three-dimensional decoration which imitated the crystal, when it uses for the three-dimensional decoration which has multiple vertices or ridgelines also about three-dimensional decorations other than a crystal shape, LED is arrange | positioned behind a vertex and a ridgeline. Similarly, the effect of making the position of the LED difficult to understand can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, in the crystal part 421, the part facing the LED 410 is a ridge line connecting the apex or the apex and the apex at the part where the crystal part 421 is three-dimensionally molded. Thereby, the light from the LED 410 mainly hits the apex and the ridge line of the crystal part 421, and these places appear to shine. For this reason, it is possible to express light emission with a texture like a crystal.

(Seventh effect)
The sub CPU 102 selects an effect lottery table (FIGS. 157 to 160) to be referenced based on the gaming state (the normal gaming state, the chance zone, etc., see FIG. 36) and the rendering state, and executes based on the winning combination. Determine the direction of the. That is, the performance to be executed is determined based on the gaming state, the performance state, and the winning combination.

Accordingly, the four screens of the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1, the louver screen G1, and the rear screen G3 are used to provide various effects while contradicting the effect states (that is, the states of these screens). It can suppress that the production | generation to perform occurs. For example, it is possible to prevent an effect of projecting an image on the louver screen G1 (louver plates G13, G14, G15) when the production state A, that is, the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position.
As a result, an appropriate effect can be executed.

(Eighth effect)
As shown in FIGS. 161 to 166, effects shown in FIGS. 167 to 171 and effects shown in various modifications (see FIGS. 176 and 177), the louver plates G13 and G14 constituting the louver screen G1 are provided. It is possible to provide a wide variety of effects that correspond to G15 and the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. For this reason, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Summary of the Invention]
In a gaming machine that drives a movable accessory for production using an accessory driving means such as a motor as described in JP-A-2014-108148, the movable accessory is in a stopped state. However, when the movable accessory is stopped in a state where the accessory driving means is excited, there is a problem that the aging deterioration of the accessory driving means proceeds.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a reel screen mechanism F1), an accessory driving means (for example, a drive motor F21) for driving the movable accessory, and a drive for controlling the accessory driving means. Control means (sub CPU102), wherein the movable accessory can be stopped without exciting the accessory driving means, and an excitation stop position where the movable accessory can be stopped by exciting the accessory driving means. The drive control means starts timing the excitation stop time triggered by controlling the accessory driving means to stop the movable accessory at the excitation stop position, and stops the excitation stop. When the specified time (for example, 65000 ms) has elapsed, the accessory driving means is controlled to move the movable accessory to the stationary position, and the movable accessory moves to the stationary position. The won game drive means a predetermined time (the motor control direction "H", 100 ms) after excitation stop and has a configuration for controlling the won game drive means in a non-excited state.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the aged deterioration of the accessory driving means is progressed so that the state in which the movable accessory is stopped while the accessory driving means is excited does not elapse for a specified time or longer. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the gaming machine according to the present invention can suppress a failure due to aged deterioration of the accessory driving means.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an effect execution means (sub CPU 102) for executing an effect including the movement of the movable accessory, wherein the stationary position is a first stationary position (for example, a reel standby position) and When the drive control means controls the accessory driving means so as to move the movable accessory up to the stationary position, the production execution means comprises a second stationary position (for example, a reel exposure position). The movable accessory may be moved to the first stationary position or the second stationary position in accordance with the effect being executed, and the effect of the movable accessory may be terminated.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention moves the movable accessory to the first stationary position or the second stationary position according to the effect being performed when the movable accessory is movable to the stationary position. Since the effect by the movable accessory is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459, an image displayed on a screen device is displayed on a screen device by switching between a plurality of screens having different shapes. Can be diversified.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, when an error video representing an error related to the gaming machine is displayed on the screen, the shapes of the plurality of screens are different from each other. Are not meshed, and there is a problem that the visibility of the error video may deteriorate.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) for outputting a video, and a plurality of display devices (fixed screen mechanism D, fixed at least one capable of displaying the video output by the video output means). A gaming machine having a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1), and a display control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the video output means and the plurality of display devices, wherein the display control means Error detection means (for example, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74) for detecting an error relating to the gaming machine, and display device specifying means (sub CPU102) for specifying the display device on which the video output by the video output means is displayed When the error is detected by the error detection means, the error detection means Error display means (error display processing executed by the sub CPU 102) for displaying an error video representing the detected error on any of the plurality of display devices, and the display control means is controlled by the display device specifying means. An error video corresponding to the specified display device is output to the video output means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an error in accordance with the display device on which the video output by the video output means is displayed among the plurality of display devices when an error relating to the gaming machine is detected. Since the video is output to the video output means, the visibility of the error video can be improved.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes error video storage means (ROM cartridge substrate 76) for storing error videos corresponding to the plurality of display devices, and the video output means includes a video projection device (projector mechanism B2). The display control means includes a focal length control means (step S504 of start command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102) for controlling a focal length of the video output means, and the display control means The error video corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means from the error image stored in the error video storage means is output to the video output means at the focal length controlled by the focal length control means. It may be.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention causes the video output means to output the error video corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means from the error image stored in the error video storage means. It is possible to cause the video output means to output an error video corresponding to the screen on which the video output by is displayed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a non-movable sub display device (image display device 201a) whose display area is narrower than any of the plurality of display devices, and the display control means is connected to the video output means. An error image representing the same content as the error video to be output may be displayed on the sub display device.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can check an error relating to a gaming machine even in a sub-display device that has a stable display performance because the display area is narrower and non-movable than any of the plurality of display devices. .

  In a conventional gaming machine having a movable accessory at a plurality of positions as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-42893, inconsistency occurs in the positional relationship when various operation controls are performed by the plurality of movable accessories. There is a problem that the movable accessory may not operate normally.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1) and a second reference position (for example, a reel standby position) that are movable with respect to a first reference position (for example, a front standby position). A plurality of movable combinations including a second movable combination (for example, a reel screen mechanism F1) movable on the basis, a first combination drive means (for example, a drive motor E25) for driving the first movable combination; A second accessory driving means (for example, a drive motor F21) for driving the second movable accessory; a drive control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the first accessory driving means and the second accessory driving means; And an accessory position determining means (sub CPU102) for determining whether or not the first movable accessory is at the first reference position, wherein the drive control means attaches the second movable accessory to the first reference position. 2 Move from the reference position In some cases, when the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not in the first reference position, the first accessory is controlled by controlling the first accessory driving means. The first reference position is movable.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention enables the first movable accessory when the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position when the second movable accessory is moved from the second reference position. When the second movable combination is moved from the second reference position after the first movable position is moved to the first reference position, an inconsistency occurs in the positional relationship between the first movable combination and the second movable combination. It is possible to prevent the accessory from working normally.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an effect executing means (sub CPU102) for executing an effect including the movement of the plurality of movable accessories, and the effect executing means includes the second movable accessory. When performing the effect of moving from the second reference position, if the first movable accessory is determined not to be at the first reference position by the accessory position determination unit, the first drive control unit determines the first After controlling the accessory driving means to move the first movable accessory to the first reference position, the second accessory driving means is controlled to move the second movable accessory from the second reference position. You may make it perform the effect to move.

  With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position, the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position by the accessory position determination unit. If it is determined that the first movable combination is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means, then the player is given an effect to move the second movable combination from the second reference position. Production can be performed without giving a sense of incongruity.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect executing means executes an effect based on the effect data representing the effect operation and executes the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. In addition, when the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position, the effect representing the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. Based on the effect data in which effect data representing the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted before the data, and effect data representing the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted. An effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position may be executed.

  With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position, the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position by the accessory position determination unit. If it is determined, the effect data indicating the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted before the effect data indicating the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. Therefore, after the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means, it is possible to execute an effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position.

  A conventional gaming machine that drives a movable accessory as described in JP-A-2014-42893 by an accessory driving means such as a motor includes a movable part of the movable accessory, an accessory driving means, and a movable part and an accessory. Since there is a risk that the movable accessory may not operate normally due to aging deterioration of the gear mechanism between the driving means and the like, a countermeasure when the movable accessory does not operate normally is required.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1), an accessory driving means (for example, a drive motor E25) for driving the movable accessory, and a drive for controlling the accessory driving means. A control means (sub CPU102), an accessory position determining means (sub CPU102) for determining whether or not the movable accessory is at a reference position (for example, a front standby position or a front exposure position), and the accessory position determination. An accessory position error detecting means (sub CPU102) for detecting an error related to the position of the movable accessory based on a result of the determination by the means, the accessory position error detecting means at the start of a unit game, When the movable accessory is not in the reference position, it is detected as an error, and the drive control means is triggered when the error is detected by the accessory position error detection means. If the predetermined error condition has it is satisfied, has the structure to prohibit driving of the movable won game by the won game drive means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention prohibits the driving of the movable accessory when an error related to the position of the movable accessory is detected. Therefore, it is possible to take measures when the movable accessory stops operating normally without requiring any special processing.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention protects parts such as the movable accessory and the accessory driving means in order to prohibit the driving of the movable accessory when an error relating to the position of the movable accessory is detected. Can do.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined error condition is that an error is detected continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) by the accessory position error detecting means at the start of the unit game. It may be established.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention, under the condition that an error has been continuously detected a predetermined number of times, prohibits the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means. When an error relating to the position of the movable accessory is erroneously detected, the driving of the movable accessory can be prevented from being prohibited.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the drive control means is that the gaming machine is turned on, or no error is detected by the accessory position error detecting means at the start of the unit game. As a trigger, the number of errors detected by the accessory position error detection means may be reset.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention eliminates the error related to the position of the movable accessory by performing the initialization operation by turning on the power to the gaming machine (so-called “power-on reset”). As a result, the number of errors is reset when the power is turned on, so that the movable accessory can be operated normally without requiring any special processing to eliminate the error related to the position of the movable accessory. You can take measures when it stops working.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable accessory is composed of a plurality of screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), and image output means (projector mechanism B2) that projects an image on the plurality of screens. ) And focal length control means for controlling the focal length of the video output means (step S504 in the start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102), the focal length control means being controlled by the drive control means. The focal distance is controlled according to the plurality of screens driven by the controlled accessory driving means, and the focal distance is maintained when the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means is prohibited. You may make it do.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention maintains the focal distance when the screen driving by the accessory driving means is prohibited, so that the visibility of the image projected on the screen is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-135540, during a unit game, an image for presentation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, so information relating to gaming machines such as a payout table and an arrangement of symbols When displaying on the liquid crystal display device, there is a problem that the production is interrupted.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an image display device (201a) that displays an image, a contact input device (touch sensor 201b) that is superposed on the image display device and capable of contact input, and an operation on the contact input device. Display control means (sub CPU102) for displaying an image representing the information displayed on the image display device, and game information recording means (sub CPU102) for recording game information representing the contents of the game, wherein the display control means In response to the operation of the contact input device, an image (top screen 212) representing information related to the game is displayed on the image display device, and even in the unit game, according to the operation of the contact input device. A user interface image (menu screen 216) for performing various operations for recording game information by the game information recording means is displayed on the image display device. After, having a configuration in accordance with an operation of the touch input device, allowing various operations of the recording of the game information by the gaming information recording means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes an image display device capable of displaying information related to the game in addition to the display means for displaying the effect video during the unit game. However, information about the game can be displayed without interrupting the performance.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, various operations for recording game information by the game information recording means include the start of recording of game information by the game information recording means and the recording of game information by the game information recording means. And the end of the recording of the game information by the game information recording means may be possible.

  With this configuration, even in the unit game, the gaming machine according to the present invention can start recording game information, refer to record game information, and record game information according to the operation of the contact input device. The end can be executed by the player.

  In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-167192 A, when the light source is turned off, the pattern on the decorative sheet is hardly visible. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult for the player to know where the game state is lit before and when the game state shifts to a predetermined game state.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit (display unit 100) for displaying an image, a protective cover (20) provided in front of the display unit and capable of visually recognizing the image displayed on the display unit, A decorative portion (22a, 22b) disposed on the inner side of the protective cover and decorated with a picture representing a game state, a light source (decorative LEDs 23a, 23b) for irradiating light from the back of the decorative portion, and a lighting state of the light source A light source control means (sub CPU102) for controlling the game state, wherein the light source control means has shifted to the predetermined gaming state when the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state. Compared with the state, the light source is turned on with a low luminance, and the pattern decorated on the decoration portion has a configuration that is visible from the outside of the protective cover even when the light source is turned on with a low luminance. .

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention allows the decorative pattern to be visually recognized by turning on the light source of the decorative portion with low brightness even when the gaming state has not shifted to the predetermined gaming state. In order to facilitate the game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where the game state is lit when the game state shifts to a predetermined game state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the protective cover may have a light shielding property against light incident from the outside to the inside.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a light shielding property against the light incident from the outside to the inside, so that the visibility of the image displayed on the display means by the external light is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the light source is turned off, the light source control means converts light source data for turning off the light source into light source data to be turned on at a predetermined low luminance, and then converts the light source data. You may make it control the lighting state of the said light source based on light source data.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when turning off the light source, the light source data for turning off the light source is converted into light source data to be turned on at a predetermined low luminance, and based on the converted light source data, In order to control the lighting state of the light source, it is possible to turn on the light source with low luminance during a period when the light source is required to be turned off by simply converting the light source data.

  The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146523 prompts the operation of the effect button to advance the effect by turning on the LED provided on the effect button. The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-178972 displays an image for notifying the timing of operating the effect button on the liquid crystal display device.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, an LED provided on the effect button for proceeding the effect is turned on to prompt the operation of the effect button, and an image for informing the timing of operating the effect button is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When displaying on a display means such as a device, if the state of the LED provided on the effect button and the image displayed on the display means are not linked, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (display unit 100) for displaying an effect video, an effect operation means (chance button 33) used for the effect, and an effect operation light source (provided with the effect operation means). (Chance button LED 34), effect determining means (sub CPU102) for determining the effect according to the progress of the game, and effect operation display means (displaying the video according to the effect determined by the effect determining means) on the display means ( A sub CPU 102) and an effect operation detecting means (chance switch 35) for detecting an operation of the effect operation means, and the effect operation display means determines the effect when the effect is triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. If determined by the means, the display means displays a video prompting the operation of the effect operation means, and turns on the effect operation light source. When the operation of the effect operation means is detected by the effect operation detection means, the display of the video prompting the operation of the effect operation means by the display means is terminated and the effect operation light source is turned off. Have

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the light emission of the production operation light source provided in the production operation unit is linked with the display of the video prompting the operation of the production operation unit, the production operation light source is turned off, and the production operation is performed. Since the end of the display of the video prompting the operation of the means is linked, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect determining means determines an effect triggered by an operation of the effect operating means based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number for lottery, and the effect operation The display means imitates the shape of the effect operation means in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means when an effect determined by the operation of the effect operation means is determined by the effect determination means. An image may be displayed.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number for lottery, and therefore operates the effect operation means. It is possible to execute an effect as an opportunity at an appropriate frequency.

  In addition, when the game machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, a video imitating the shape of the effect operation means is displayed in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means. Therefore, the operation of the production operation means can be urged visually.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, when an operation effective for the progress of the game is performed without operating the effect button even though the operation of the effect button is urged, the effect button There is a problem that the production of the player is not executed and the interest of the player cannot be improved by the production.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (display unit 100) for displaying an effect video, an effect operating means (chance button 33) used for the effect, and an effect determination for determining the effect according to the progress of the game. Means (sub CPU102), an effect executing means (sub CPU102) for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect image for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determining means. Display means (sub CPU102) and presentation operation detection means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the presentation operation means, and the presentation video display means has an effect triggered by the operation of the presentation operation means. When determined by the effect determining means, an image prompting the operation of the effect operating means is displayed on the display means, and the effect operation detecting hand Display of an image prompting the display means to operate the effect operation means when an operation of the effect operation means is detected or when a predetermined execution condition different from the operation of the effect operation means is satisfied. When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the state where the effect determined by the operation of the effect operation means is determined by the effect determination means, the effect operation means It has the structure which performs the production | presentation triggered by this operation.

  With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, even if the effect operation means is not operated, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Since an effect is triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, the player's interest can be improved by the effect.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes game medium detection means (medal sensor 46 and BET switch 62) for detecting the insertion of game media, and the predetermined execution condition is determined by the game medium detection means. Further, it may be further included that the input is detected.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention allows a game to be played for the next unit game even when the effect operating means is not operated when an effect is triggered by the operation of the effect operating means. Since the production triggered by the operation of the production operation means is executed when the medium is inserted, the production triggered by the operation of the production operation means can be executed almost certainly.

  In gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146588, the operation order of the stop operation may greatly affect the profit obtained by the player. If the sex is not secured, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) for outputting video, and a plurality of display devices (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and the like) that can display the video output by the video output means. Reel screen mechanism F1), a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) displaying a plurality of symbols, and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reels. , A start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting a game start operation, and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the game start operation by the start operation detecting means ( Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R) and a predetermined winning probability among a plurality of roles based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining a combination; a stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel; Stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation order of the stop operation based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and at least one of the plurality of display devices The display device (reel screen mechanism F1) is configured to be movable, and the stop notification unit displays an operation order notification video indicating the operation order of the stop operation in a display area of any one of the plurality of display devices. And the region for displaying the operation order notification image moves according to the movable position of the movable display device. Uni has a configuration to switch the operation sequence informs the video to the video output unit.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an operation sequence representing the operation sequence of the stop operation so that the region for displaying the operation sequence notification image moves according to the movable position of the display device configured to be movable. By switching the notification video to the video output means, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the visibility of the operation sequence notification video is ensured.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of display devices are configured to be movable with a first display device (fixed screen mechanism D) on which the operation order notification video is displayed by the stop notification means. A second display device (reel screen mechanism F1), wherein the first display device has a plurality of display areas including a first display area and a second display area, and the second display apparatus When the second display device is not in the exposed position, the stop notification means can be moved according to the first display area of the first display device. The operation order notification video is displayed on the first display area of the first display device, and when the second display device is at the exposure position, the second display area corresponding to the second display area of the first display area is displayed. The operation sequence notification video is It may be displayed in the second display area of the display device.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention allows the first display area of the first display device when the second display device that is movable to the exposed position that covers the first display device is not in the exposed position. When the second display device is in the exposure position, the operation order notification video corresponding to the second display region of the first display device is displayed on the first display region of the first display device. Is displayed in the second display area of the first display device, so that the visibility of the operation order notification video is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first display device includes a front surface (a reflective surface of the front reflective portion D1), a left surface (a reflective surface of the left reflective portion D3) and a right surface (left and right reflective surfaces) disposed on the left and right of the front. And a lower surface (reflecting surface of the lower surface reflecting portion D4) sandwiched between the left surface and the right surface on the lower side of the front surface, the first surface of the first display device. The display area may be included in the front surface, and the second display area of the first display area may be included in the lower surface.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is included in the front of the first display device when the second display device that can be moved to the exposed position that covers the first display device is not in the exposed position. When the operation order notification image is displayed on the first display area and the second display device is at the exposure position, the operation order notification image is displayed on the second display area included on the lower surface of the first display device. Since the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131586, when a special winning combination is won, there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be reduced because the game is not advantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) displaying a plurality of symbols and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And a start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting a game start operation, and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the game start operation by the start operation detecting means. (Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R), an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, Stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining unit The variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the timing and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the combination of the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 and stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R) and the symbols stopped on the effective line of the symbol display means by the change of the symbols being stopped by the reel stop control means. The winning combination determination means (main CPU 93) for determining whether or not a winning combination is won, and a specific advantageous state (for example, advantageous for the player), for example, when the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. , CT) specific advantageous state transition means (main CPU 93) for transitioning the gaming state, Stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation order of the stop operation based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means, the stop notification means being in the specific advantageous state The predetermined internal winning combination is determined based on the fact that the predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “triple chililip”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the unit game performed at If there is an addition of the duration of the ART), the operation sequence of the stop operation for stopping the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the effective line is notified, and the predetermined internal winning combination is If there is no added value, the operation sequence of the stop operation for stopping a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the effective line Is notified.

  With this configuration, when the gaming machine according to the present invention internally wins a predetermined internal winning combination, if the predetermined internal winning combination has added value, a combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is provided. When the operation order of the stop operation to be stopped on the effective line is informed and the predetermined internal winning combination has no added value, a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is displayed on the effective line. By notifying the operation sequence of the stop operation to be stopped at the same time, even if the combination of symbols based on a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped on the active line, a situation in which the player cannot obtain added value is avoided. .

  In this way, the gaming machine according to the present invention can enhance the player's interest by not being able to gain added value even if a combination of symbols based on a predetermined internal winning combination stops on the active line. It can prevent that it falls.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output means (projector mechanism B2) that outputs a production video, and a display device (fixed screen mechanism D, front panel) that can display the production video output by the video output means. A screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1), and the stop notification means may notify the operation order of the stop operation by the effect image.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can variously notify the operation order of the stop operation.

  In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042693, there is even a slight deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory recognized by the control program and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. If it occurs, the shift may further cause a shift, which may cause an inconsistency in the effect using the movable accessory, and may cause a player to feel uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1) movable between a first position (for example, a front standby position) and a second position (for example, a front exposure position), and the movable Drive control for managing the movable position of the movable accessory by updating the number of steps based on the movable reference unit of the accessory driving means (for example, the drive motor E25) and the accessory driving means. Means (sub CPU102) and a first position sensor (for example, front standby position sensor E15a) for detecting that the movable accessory is in the first position (step count “0”), The drive control means corrects the number of steps to a first value (step count “19”) when the first position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, and the first position sensor. There when changes from the sensing state to the non-detection state, has a configuration for correcting the number of the steps a second value (step count "23").

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention sets the first step number when the first position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is in the first position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. When the first position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the number of steps to the second value when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state, An error in the number of steps from when the state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is an inconsistency in the performance using the movable accessory due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. Therefore, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a second position sensor (for example, a front exposure position sensor E15b) for detecting that the movable accessory is at the second position (step count “210”). The drive control means corrects the step number to a third value (step count “192”) when the second position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, and the second position sensor When the detection state changes to the non-detection state, the number of steps may be corrected to a fourth value (step count “188”).

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is in the second position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the number of steps is set to the third number. When the second position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the number of steps to the fourth value when the detection state changes from the detection state to the non-detection state, An error in the number of steps from when the state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there is an inconsistency in the performance using the movable accessory due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. It can prevent more reliably.

(Invention related to curved portion)
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 06-035066 proposes a gaming machine that enlarges and projects a game moving image on a display screen (screen) provided in front of a gaming machine housing using a liquid crystal projector provided therein. Yes.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect using the display unit and improving the interest of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later);
A display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and a display unit (for example, a rear screen G3 described later) having a display surface forming unit (for example, a curved unit G22 described later) that forms the display surface. Prepared,
The display surface forming portion is curved such that both end portions in the width direction (for example, a side plate portion G25 described later) are closer to the projector than the central portion in the same direction.

The gaming machine includes a rotatable movable portion (for example, louver plates G13, G14, and G15 described later) disposed at a position closer to the projector than the display surface.
The movable part may be capable of displaying an image projected by the projector.

Further, the gaming machine includes a support part (for example, a frame part G23 described later) that rotatably supports the movable part,
A drive unit (for example, a stepping motor G31 described later) that is disposed at a position farther from the projector than the display surface forming unit and drives the movable unit;
A transmission unit (for example, a motor connection gear G32, a transmission gear G34, and a louver drive gear G33 described later) that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the movable unit;
An accommodating portion (for example, a cover body G7 described later) that accommodates the transmitting portion may be formed in the support portion.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the effect of the production | presentation using a display part can be improved and the interest of a game can be improved.

(Invention related to painting of rear screen)
Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 06-035066 proposes a gaming machine that enlarges and projects a game moving image on a display screen (screen) provided in front of a gaming machine casing using a liquid crystal projector provided therein.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect using the display unit and improving the interest of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later);
A display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and a display unit (for example, a rear screen G3 described later) having a display surface forming unit (for example, a curved unit G22 described later) that forms the display surface. Prepared,
The display surface forming portion is formed of a black resin,
The display surface includes a silver base layer formed by painting, and a white surface layer covering the base layer.

The gaming machine includes a rotatable movable part (for example, louver plates G13, G14, and G15 described later) disposed at a position closer to the projector than the display surface,
The movable part can display an image projected by the projector,
The portion of the movable part where the image projected by the projector can be displayed may have a silver base layer formed by painting and a white surface layer covering the base layer.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the effect of the production | presentation using a display part can be improved and the interest of a game can be improved.

(Invention related to protrusion of louver connection gear)
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178405 discloses a movable member that is movably disposed, a drive unit that moves the movable member along a track, an acceleration sensor that detects the inclination of the movable member, and a track and an acceleration sensor. There has been proposed a gaming machine having position calculating means for calculating the position of the moving member from the relationship with the tilt.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the technology for improving the accuracy of drive control of the movable accessory.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the accuracy of drive control of a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A movable accessory (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15 described later) that rotates by driving of the driving unit,
A gear (for example, a louver driving gear G33 described later) that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the movable accessory;
A first detected portion and a second detected portion (for example, two protrusions G41 described later) provided on the outer peripheral portion of the gear;
A detection unit (for example, a sensor G40 described later) that detects the first detection unit and the second detection unit;
The gaming machine, wherein the first detected part and the second detected part are arranged on the same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the gear.

The gaming machine includes a projector (for example, an irradiation light device B described later) that projects an image,
The movable accessory includes a first surface (for example, a first surface G21a described later) that forms a display surface on which an image projected by the projector can be displayed, and a second surface opposite to the first surface. A movable part having a surface (for example, a second surface G21b described later) and rotatably provided;
When the detection unit detects the first detection unit or the second detection unit, the first surface or the second surface may be substantially parallel to the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the precision of drive control of a movable accessory can be improved.

(Invention related to decorative body)
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210690 proposes a gaming machine including a decorative lamp and a lens member that covers the decorative lamp from the front side.

  However, there is room for improvement in the light emission effect by the light emitting unit.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitting unit.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A light emitting unit (for example, LED 410 described later);
A light transmissive part (for example, a light transmissive member 405 described later) formed of a light transmissive material and covering the light emitting part,
The light transmission part is a polyhedron having a vertex,
The light emitting unit is arranged at a position corresponding to the apex.

In addition, the gaming machine includes a light diffusion unit (for example, light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b described later) that is disposed between the light transmission unit and the light emission unit and diffuses light emitted from the light emission unit. ,
A predetermined space may be provided between a portion of the light transmitting portion through which light emitted from the light emitting portion is transmitted and the light diffusing portion.

  According to the present invention, the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitting unit can be enhanced.

  (Invention related to the effect lottery based on the effect state)

  Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-17520 proposes a gaming machine in which a sub CPU and a torch drive circuit drive torches in accordance with torch drive data designated by the contents of effects.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are few types of effects using torches that are movable accessories, and there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of various effects using a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling the effect of the game;
Game state control means (for example, a later-described sub CPU 102) for controlling a gaming state (for example, a later-described normal gaming state or CZ);
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) for determining an internal winning combination;
A plurality of movable accessories (for example, a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1 in the display unit 200 described later), each of which has a different aspect of the effect to be performed,
Each of the plurality of movable accessories is in a state where an effect can be executed (for example, a front exposure position and a reel exposure position described later) and a state where an effect cannot be executed (for example, a front standby position and a reel standby position described later). Can be set to
The effect control means determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the gaming state, and the state of the movable accessory. Gaming machine.

The gaming machine includes a projector (for example, an irradiation light device B described later) that projects an image,
Each of the plurality of movable accessories is a display unit capable of displaying an image projected by the projector,
The state in which the effect can be executed is a state in which an image projected by the projector can be displayed,
The state in which the effect cannot be executed may be a state in which an image projected by the projector cannot be displayed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform various effects using a movable accessory.

  (Invention related to production using louver board)

  Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-17520 proposes a gaming machine in which a sub CPU and a torch drive circuit drive torches in accordance with torch drive data designated by the contents of effects.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are few types of effects using torches that are movable accessories, and there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of various effects using a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) for determining an internal winning combination;
Fluctuation display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later) configured by a plurality of display rows and variably displaying symbols necessary for the game;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R described later) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of display columns and receiving a player's stop operation;
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) for detecting the stop operation;
Stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 96 to be described later) for stopping the change display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means;
Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling the effect of the game;
A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later);
A first surface (for example, a first surface G21a to be described later) that forms a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a second surface (for example, to be described later) opposite to the first surface. A plurality of movable accessories (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15) having a second surface G21b) and rotatably provided;
The plurality of movable accessories correspond to the plurality of stop operation means,
The production control means includes
During the play of the game, the first surface or the second surface is substantially the same for the player that the movable members corresponding to the stop operation means that has received the stop operation are rotated. A gaming machine, wherein the game machine is stopped at a parallel position, and an image projected by a projector is displayed on the first surface or the second surface of the stopped movable accessory.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform various effects using a movable accessory.

  Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 06-035066 proposes a gaming machine that enlarges and projects a game moving image on a display screen (screen) provided in front of a gaming machine housing using a liquid crystal projector provided therein. Yes.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect using the display unit and improving the interest of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine including a projector (for example, an irradiation light device B described later) and a movable member (for example, a front screen mechanism E1 or a reel screen mechanism F1 described later) for projecting projection light emitted from the projector,
The movable member is displaceable between a first position (for example, a front standby position or a reel standby position described below) and a second position (for example, a front exposure position or a reel exposure position described below),
In an effect involving a displacement of the movable member from the first position to the second position, projection of the effect image is started before the displacement is completed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the effect of the production | presentation using a display part can be improved and the interest of a game can be improved.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reel (variable display)
4. Display window (design display means)
17S Stop switch (stop operation detection means)
20 Protective cover 22a, 22b Decoration part 23a, 23b Decoration LED (light source)
33 Chance button (direction operation means)
34 Chance button LED (production operation light source)
35 Chance switch (production operation detection means)
46 Medal sensor (game medium detection means)
51L, 51C, 51R Stepping motor (design variation means, reel stop control means) 62 BET switch (game medium detection means)
64 Start switch (start operation detection means)
74 24h Door open / close monitoring unit (error detection means)
76 ROM cartridge substrate (error video storage means)
93 main CPU (internal winning combination determining means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, specific advantageous state transition means, notification means, stop notification means, game control means)
100 display unit (display means)
102 sub CPU (drive control means, effect execution means, accessory position determination means, accessory position determination means, accessory position error detection means, display control means, game information recording means, light source control means, display device specifying means, effect Determining means, effect operation display means, effect image display means, notification means, stop notification means, error display means, focal length control means, effect control means)
200 Display Unit 201a Image Display Device (Sub Display Device)
201b Touch sensor (contact input device)
B2 Projector mechanism (video output means, video projection device)
D Fixed screen mechanism (display device)
E1 Front screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
F1 reel screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
E25 Drive motor (first accessory driving means, accessory driving means)
F21 drive motor (second accessory driving means, accessory driving means)
G fixed screen mechanism G1 louver screen G2 louver drive mechanism G3 rear screen G4, G5, G6 louver drive part G7 cover body G8 lower cover part G9 upper cover part G10 upper surface part G11 side part G12 slope part G13 louver plate G14 louver plate G15 louver plate G21a First surface G21b Second surface G22 Curved portion G23 Frame portion G24 Rear plate portion G25 Side plate portion G31 Stepping motor G32 Motor connection gear G33 Louver drive gear G34 Transmission gear G40 Sensor G41 Projection portion

Claims (2)

A movable accessory that rotates by driving of the drive unit;
A gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the movable accessory;
A first detected portion and a second detected portion provided on an outer peripheral portion of the gear;
A detection unit that detects the first detection unit and the second detection unit;
The gaming machine, wherein the first detected part and the second detected part are arranged on the same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the gear. A projector for projecting images,
The movable accessory has a first surface that forms a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and is rotatably provided. Moving parts,
The said 1st surface or the said 2nd surface becomes substantially parallel with respect to a player, when the said detection part detects the said 1st to-be-detected part or the said 2nd to-be-detected part. The gaming machine described in 1.

Images